Xanté Accel-a-Writer 8300v3

®
A8300D-6th
03/09/98
100-100269
_____________________________________________________ i
Trademarks
XANTÉ®, Accel-a-Writer®, and Accel-a-Graphix® are registered trademarks
of XANTÉ CORPORATION, registered in the United States Patent and
Trademark Office. X•ACT™ and FilmStar™ are trademarks of XANTÉ
CORPORATION.
Adobe®, Adobe® Illustrator®, Adobe® Photoshop®, Adobe® PageMaker®,

Adobe® PostScript®, and the PostScript® logo are registered trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated, registered in the United States Patent and
Trademark Office. Adobe® Acrobat™, Adobe® PostScript® 3™, Adobe®
Separator™, and PrePrint™ are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated
which may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Aldus® is a registered
trademark of Aldus Corporation, registered in the United States Patent and
Trademark Office. Apple®, AppleTalk®, EtherTalk®, LaserWriter®, and
Macintosh® are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in
the United States Patent and Trademark Office. LocalTalk™, Balloon
Help™, and SimpleText™ are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
AutoCAD® is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc., registered in the
United States Patent and Trademark Office.
Canon® is a registered trademark of Canon USA, registered in the United

States Patent and Trademark Office. Centronics® is a registered trademark of
Centronics Data Computer Corporation, registered in the United States Patent
and Trademark Office. CorelDRAW™ is a trademark of Corel Corporation.
DEC® is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation,

registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office.
Hewlett-Packard®, HP® and LaserJet® are registered trademarks of Hewlett-

Packard, Co., registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office.
Intel® and Pentium® are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation

registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office. Token Ring® is
a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation,
registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office. Hammermill®
is a registered trademark of International Paper, registered in the United
States Patent and Trademark Office. ITC Avante Garde Gothic®, ITC
Bookman®, ITC Zapf Chancery®, and ITC Zapf Dingbats® are registered
trademarks of International Typeface Corporation, registered in the United
States Patent and Trademark Office and some foreign countries. ITC
typefaces are copyrighted © by the International Typeface Corporation.
iibb ____________________________________________________
Helvetica®, Palatino®, New Century Schoolbook®, and Times® are
registered trademarks of Linotype AG and/or its subsidiaries, registered in
the United States Patent and Trademark Office.
FreeHand™ is a trademark of Macromedia, Inc. Microsoft®, MS-DOS®,

Windows®, and Windows NT® are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation, registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office.
MultiAd Creator® is a registered trademark of MultiAd Services, Inc.,
Novell® and NetWare® are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc., registered

in the United States Patent and Trademark Office.
Olivetti™ is a trademark of Olivetti, Inc.
QuarkXPress® is a registered trademark of Quark, Inc., registered in the

UL® is a registered trademark of Underwriters Laboratory, registered in the

United States Patent and Trademark Office. ENERGY STAR® is a
registered trademark of the US EPA, registered in the United States Patent
and Trademark Office.
Varityper® is a registered trademark of Varityper, Inc., registered in the

Ethernet® and Xerox® are registered trademarks of Xerox Corporation,

Manual Notice
XANTÉ CORPORATION reserves the right to make changes to this
manual and to the equipment described herein without notice. Every
effort has been made to ensure that this manual is free of
inaccuracies and omissions. However, XANTÉ CORPORATION
makes no warranty of any kind including, but not limited to, any
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
purpose with regard to this manual.
XANTÉ CORPORATION assumes no responsibility for, or liability

for, errors contained in this manual or for incidental, special, or
consequential damages arising out of the furnishing of this manual,
or the use of this manual in operating the equipment, or in
connection with the performance of the equipment when so operated.
_____________________________________________________ iii
Proprietary
The digitally encoded software included with the XANTÉ Accel-a-
Writer 8300 printer is copyrighted © 1998 by XANTÉ
CORPORATION. All Rights Reserved. Patent Pending. This
software may not be reproduced, modified, displayed, transferred, or
copied in any form or manner or on any media, without the express
written permission of XANTÉ CORPORATION.
Copyright
This manual is Copyrighted © 1998 by XANTÉ CORPORATION. All
Rights Reserved. Printed in the USA. This manual may not be copied in
whole or in part, nor transferred to any other media or language without the
express written permission of XANTÉ CORPORATION.
Safety Information
The printer generates a small amount of ozone gas during image transfer
in the printing process. When shipped from the factory, the printer
meets the Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) standard for ozone emission.
Warning! An invisible laser beam which radiates inside the laser

printer’s scanner unit can cause permanent eye damage. DO
NOT disassemble or try to adjust the laser scanner unit.
FCC Classification
Warning! Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly

approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment
in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
ivbb ____________________________________________________
Shielded cables must be used with this unit to ensure compliance with the
FCC Class A limits.
Power Information
Engine: 100 - 120 volts; 3.5 amps; 385 watts
Power Cord
The power cord is the main disconnect device. It should be plugged into an
easily accessible outlet.
For 115 Volt Configuration:

The power cord to be used with 115 Volt configuration is minimum type
SJT (SVT) 18/3, rated 250 Volts ac, 10 Amps with a maximum length of 15
feet. One terminated in an IEC 320 attachment plug. The other end is
terminated in a NEMA 5-15P plug.
For 230 Volt Configuration

The power cord to be used with 230 Volt configuration is minimum type
SJT (SVT) 18/3, rated 250 Volts ac, 10 Amps with a maximum length of 15
feet. One terminated in an IEC 320 attachment plug. The other end is
terminated as required by the country where it will be installed.
Le cable de transport d'energie que doit etre utilis'e la configuration 230

Volts est le type minimum SJT (SVT), 18/3, nominal 250 Volts ac, 10
Amps, 4.5 m long maximum. Un bout est raccorde comme exige par le pays
ou il sera utilis'e.
Das Netzkabel ist das haupfsachliche Diskonnektionsmittel, es sollte in eine

leicht erreichbare steckdos gesteckt werden.
Das Netzkabel kann mit einer 230 Volts Konfiguration verwonder werden
vom typ: Minimum VDE or HAR, 3 X 1.00 mm2, 250 V ac, 10 Amps,
maximal 4.5 m long. Ein Ende ontspriche dem Stecker IEC 320. Das andoro
Ende entspricht den Anfoderungen des entsprechenden Landes.
Power Conservation
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, XANTÉ
CORPORATION has determined this product
meets the ENERGY STAR® guidelines for
energy efficiency. This printer enters a low-
power state after 30 minutes of inactivity. This
complies with the U.S. EPA ENERGY STAR
Program, but is not an EPA endorsement of the
product.
_____________________________________________________ v
Manufacturer’s Declaration of Conformity
The Product Accel-a-Writer 8300 has been designed and manufactured in
accordance with the following international standards:
EN 50081-1 “Generic Emissions Standard for Residential,
Commercial and Light Industrial Products of” 01,
Feb. 1991
EN 50082-1 “Generic Immunity Standard for Residential,
Commercial and Light Industrial Products of” 01,
Feb. 1991
EN 55022 “Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio
Interference Information Technology Equipment of”
14, April 1987
IEC 1000-4-2 “Testing Measurement Techniques, Electrostatic
Discharge of” 1995, First Edition
IEC 1000-4-3 “Testing and Measurement Techniques, Radio
Frequency, Electromagnetic Field Immunity Test of”
1995 First Edition
IEC 1000-4-4 “Testing and Measurement Techniques, Electrical
Fast Transient/Burst Immunity Test of” 1995 First
edition
MIL-STD-45662A “Calibration System Requirements”
EN 60950 “Safety of Information Technology Equipment
including Electrical Business Equipment”
I, the undersigned, hereby declare that the equipment specified above

conforms to the above Directives and Standards
Place Mobile, Alabama

Date December 7, 1995 Robert C. Ross, Jr.
President
Colophon and Credits

This manual was written using Adobe PageMaker, Adobe Acrobat, Adobe
Photoshop, and FreeHand. The typefaces for the main body of the manual
are Times, Helvetica, and Courier.
Credits: edited by Lesa Moore; written by Lane Crume, Stephanie Wright,

and Pam Throgmorton; designed by Gene Everette; illustrated by Phillip
Shepard, Dan Wilson, Susie Simmons, and Pat Richey; special thanks to
XANTÉ Engineering, XANTÉ Technical Support, and all of our reviewers.
◊◊◊
vibb ____________________________________________________
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 - Introduction .............................................................. 1-1
The XANTÉ Accel-a-Writer 8300 ........................................... 1-3
About this Manual .................................................................... 1-4
Manual Conventions ................................................................ 1-5
Other Helpful Documentation .................................................. 1-6
About Your Printer .................................................................. 1-6
Printer Features .................................................................. 1-8
PostScript Typefaces ......................................................... 1-9
About XANTÉ Utilities ......................................................... 1-10
Warranty and Product Registration ........................................ 1-10
Chapter 2 - Installation ................................................................ 2-1

Introduction .............................................................................. 2-3
Printer Location ....................................................................... 2-3
Package Contents ..................................................................... 2-4
Unpacking the Printer .............................................................. 2-5
Overview of the Accel-a-Writer 8300 ..................................... 2-7
Installing Options ..................................................................... 2-9
Controller Board Upgrades ............................................... 2-9
Ethernet Upgrade ........................................................ 2-9
Extra Wide Print Upgrade ......................................... 2-10
Internal Hard Disk Upgrade ...................................... 2-10
NEIT Upgrade ........................................................... 2-10
Print Resolution Upgrade .......................................... 2-10
RAM Upgrades ......................................................... 2-11
Paper Handling Options .................................................. 2-11
Paper Feeder .............................................................. 2-12
Duplexer .................................................................... 2-14
The Toner Cartridge ............................................................... 2-24
The Paper Cassettes ............................................................... 2-28
The Manual Feed Tray ........................................................... 2-32
_____________________________________________________ vii
Verify the Printer Setup ......................................................... 2-35
Connecting the Power Cord ............................................ 2-35
Starting the Printer ........................................................... 2-35
Reviewing the Start-up Page ........................................... 2-36
The Printer Interfaces ............................................................. 2-36
Connecting to a Macintosh .............................................. 2-37
Connecting to a PC .......................................................... 2-38
Connecting to the Parallel Port ................................. 2-38
Connecting to the Serial Port .................................... 2-39
Connecting an External SCSI Disk ................................. 2-41
Connecting an External SCSI Disk to the Printer ..... 2-41
Initializing a Hard Disk ............................................. 2-42
Chapter 3 - Macintosh Setup ....................................................... 3-1

Introduction .............................................................................. 3-3
Before You Begin .................................................................... 3-3
XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM (Macintosh) ................................. 3-3
XInstaller .................................................................................. 3-5
Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0 ....................................................... 3-9
Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers ............................................. 3-9
Selecting the Adobe PostScript Printer Driver .................. 3-9
Adobe PSPrinter 8.3.1 ................................................ 3-9
The AdobePS 8.5.1 ................................................... 3-10
PSPrinter 8.3.1 ................................................................. 3-11
Installing PSPrinter 8.3.1 and the PPD ..................... 3-11
PSPrinter 8.3 User Guide .......................................... 3-13
Mac Watermark Plug-in Folder ................................ 3-13
AdobePS 8.5.1 ................................................................. 3-14
Installing AdobePS 8.5.1 .......................................... 3-14
Installing the PPD for AdobePS 8.5.1 ...................... 3-15
Configuring the PPD ....................................................... 3-16
Manual PPD Setup .................................................... 3-18
Configuring the Printer .................................................... 3-19
Downloads Folder .................................................................. 3-20
App Drivers Folder ................................................................ 3-22
Aldus APD Folder ........................................................... 3-22
Aldus PPD Folder ............................................................ 3-23
QuarkXPress PDF Folder ................................................ 3-23
viiibb ____________________________________________________
XANTÉ Command Center ..................................................... 3-24
The General Menu ........................................................... 3-24
Printer Status ............................................................. 3-25
Printer Information ................................................... 3-25
Spooling .................................................................... 3-25
Margin Adjustment ................................................... 3-25
X•ACT Calibration ................................................... 3-26
Download PostScript File ......................................... 3-26
Test Directory ........................................................... 3-26
Reboot Printer ........................................................... 3-26
Startup Page .............................................................. 3-26
The Networking Menu .................................................... 3-27
Novell Print Server ................................................... 3-27
AppleTalk ................................................................. 3-28
TCP/IP ...................................................................... 3-28
The Color Menu .............................................................. 3-28
Transfer Curve .......................................................... 3-29
CRD Directories ....................................................... 3-29
Linearize ................................................................... 3-29
XANTÉ Linearizer ................................................................. 3-29
Adobe Downloader ................................................................ 3-30
The File Menu ................................................................. 3-30
Download Fonts ........................................................ 3-30
Download PostScript File ......................................... 3-30
The Special Menu ............................................................ 3-31
Printer Status ............................................................. 3-31
Printer Font Directory ............................................... 3-31
Other Special Menu Options ..................................... 3-31
Procedures .............................................................................. 3-31
The Spooler ..................................................................... 3-32
Using the Front Panel ............................................... 3-32
Using XANTÉ Command Center ............................. 3-32
Calibration with a Densitometer ...................................... 3-36
Printing a Calibration Strip ....................................... 3-36
Using the Densitometer ............................................ 3-37
Linearizing the Densitometer Data ........................... 3-38
Creating a Custom Gamma Curve ............................ 3-39
Accurate Calibration Technology.................................... 3-40
_____________________________________________________ ix
Printer Margin Adjustment .............................................. 3-42
Downloaded Fonts ........................................................... 3-44
Downloading Fonts ................................................... 3-44
Reviewing and Removing Downloaded Fonts ......... 3-46
Chapter 4 - PC Setup ................................................................... 4-1

Introduction .............................................................................. 4-3
Before You Begin .................................................................... 4-3
XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM (PC) ............................................. 4-3
XANTÉ Utilities Installer ........................................................ 4-6
XANTÉ Utilities and Application Drivers ........................ 4-6
Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0 ....................................................... 4-7
Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers ............................................. 4-8
Windows 3.1 and 3.11 Printer Drivers .............................. 4-8
Installing the AdobePS Printer Driver ........................ 4-8
Installing your Printer’s PPD .................................... 4-10
Configuring the PPD for Windows 3.1 and 3.11 ...... 4-11
Deleting Previous Driver Versions ........................... 4-15
Windows 95 Drivers ........................................................ 4-16
Installing the AdobePS Printer Driver and Printer PPD ..... 4-16
Configuring the PPD for Windows 95 ...................... 4-20
Windows NT Drivers ...................................................... 4-23
Windows NT ............................................................. 4-23
Configuring the Printer .................................................... 4-28
PDFs Folder ........................................................................... 4-28
PS_Files Folder ...................................................................... 4-29
XANTÉ Command Center ..................................................... 4-31
Configuration for XANTÉ Command Center ................. 4-31
The Options Menu ........................................................... 4-32
The Controller Menu ....................................................... 4-32
Select Product ........................................................... 4-33
General ...................................................................... 4-33
Align Paper ............................................................... 4-35
CRD Directory .......................................................... 4-35
Linearize ................................................................... 4-36
Spooler ...................................................................... 4-36
Novell ........................................................................ 4-36
Test Directory ........................................................... 4-37
Transfer Curve .......................................................... 4-37
X•ACT ...................................................................... 4-37
xbb ____________________________________________________
The Ports Menu ............................................................... 4-38
The XANTÉ Linearization Tool ............................................ 4-38
Procedures .............................................................................. 4-39
The Spooler ..................................................................... 4-39
Using the Front Panel ............................................... 4-39
Using XANTÉ Command Center ............................. 4-39
Calibration with a Densitometer ...................................... 4-43
Printing a Calibration Strip ....................................... 4-43
Using the Densitometer ............................................ 4-44
Linearizing the Densitometer Data ........................... 4-45
Creating a Custom Gamma Curve ............................ 4-46
Accurate Calibration Technology.................................... 4-47
Printer Margin Adjustment .............................................. 4-49
Managing Fonts on an Optional Hard Disk ..................... 4-51
Chapter 5 - Configuration ........................................................... 5-1

Introduction .............................................................................. 5-3
Printer Control ......................................................................... 5-3
The Front Panel ........................................................................ 5-3
The Display Window ......................................................... 5-4
Front Panel Lights (LEDs) ................................................ 5-4
Front Panel Keys ............................................................... 5-5
The Configuration Menu Structure .......................................... 5-8
Selecting Menu Options .................................................... 5-8
Resetting to Factory Defaults .......................................... 5-10
The Main Menus .................................................................... 5-10
The Miscellaneous Menu ....................................................... 5-10
The Density Menu ........................................................... 5-11
The DPI Menu ................................................................. 5-12
The Gamma Menu ........................................................... 5-12
The Initial Job Menu ....................................................... 5-12
The Jam Recover Menu ................................................... 5-13
The Language Menu ........................................................ 5-13
The Manual Feed Menu .................................................. 5-13
The NEIT Menu .............................................................. 5-14
The RAM Disk Menu ...................................................... 5-14
The Font Accelerator Menu ............................................. 5-15
The Toner Page Menu ...................................................... 5-15
The Screen Menu ............................................................. 5-15
_____________________________________________________ xi
The Startup Page Menu ................................................... 5-15
The Timeout Menu .......................................................... 5-16
The Tray Switch Menu .................................................... 5-16
The 1200 DPI Menu ........................................................ 5-16
The Interfaces Menu .............................................................. 5-17
The RS232 Menu ............................................................. 5-17
The Enable Menu ...................................................... 5-18
The Mode Menu ........................................................ 5-18
The Baud Rate Menu ................................................ 5-18
The Parity Menu ....................................................... 5-18
The Flow Control Menu ............................................ 5-18
The Data Bits Menu .................................................. 5-18
The Stop Bits Menu .................................................. 5-19
The Spool Menu ........................................................ 5-19
The Parallel Menu ........................................................... 5-19
The Enable Menu ...................................................... 5-19
The Mode Menu ........................................................ 5-19
The Spool Menu ........................................................ 5-19
The LocalTalk, EtherTalk, and LPR (Line Printer) Menus ....... 5-20
The Enable Menu ...................................................... 5-20
The Mode Menu ........................................................ 5-20
The Spool Menu ........................................................ 5-20
The Novell PServer (Novell Print Server) Menu ............. 5-21
The Enable Menu ...................................................... 5-21
The Mode Menu ........................................................ 5-21
The Protocol Menu ................................................... 5-21
The Spool Menu ........................................................ 5-21
The Timeout Menu .................................................... 5-22
Chapter 6 - PPD Settings ............................................................. 6-1

Introduction .............................................................................. 6-3
About the PPD ......................................................................... 6-3
Selecting PPD Options ............................................................. 6-3
In a Macintosh Environment ............................................. 6-4
In a Windows 95 Environment .......................................... 6-6
In a Windows 3.1 Environment ......................................... 6-8
The PPD Menus ....................................................................... 6-9
Duplex ............................................................................. 6-10
Enhanced Screens ............................................................ 6-10
xiibb ____________________________________________________
Fast Imaging .................................................................... 6-11
Gamma ............................................................................ 6-11
Horizontal and Vertical Image Shift................................ 6-12
Mirror Print ...................................................................... 6-12
Negative Print .................................................................. 6-13
Resolution ........................................................................ 6-14
Save Spooled Job ............................................................. 6-15
Smooth Shading .............................................................. 6-15
Tray Switch ..................................................................... 6-16
Chapter 7 - Using Media and Toner ........................................... 7-1

Introduction .............................................................................. 7-3
Media Specifications ................................................................ 7-3
Selecting Media ................................................................. 7-3
Storing Media .................................................................... 7-4
Media Sizes .............................................................................. 7-5
Standard Media Sizes ........................................................ 7-6
XANTÉ Myriad Film Sizes ............................................... 7-7
Feeding Media to the Printer .................................................... 7-8
Determining the Leading Edge .......................................... 7-8
The Paper Cassettes ........................................................... 7-8
The Manual Feed Tray ...................................................... 7-9
Tray Chaining .................................................................. 7-10
Using Special Media .............................................................. 7-10
Printing Computer-to-Film .............................................. 7-10
Printing Transparencies ................................................... 7-11
Printing Envelopes .......................................................... 7-12
Printing Labels ................................................................ 7-12
Printing on Custom Sized Media ..................................... 7-13
Printing Double-Sided Copy .................................................. 7-14
Manual Double-Sided Copy ............................................ 7-14
Duplexing ........................................................................ 7-15
Using the Duplexer ................................................... 7-16
Handling the Toner Cartridge ................................................ 7-17
Adjusting Toner Output ................................................... 7-18
Redistributing Toner ................................................. 7-18
Changing the Density Menu ..................................... 7-18
_____________________________________________________ xiii
Chapter 8- Advanced Features .................................................... 8-1
Introduction .............................................................................. 8-3
Levels of Gray .......................................................................... 8-3
Line Screens ............................................................................. 8-4
Scanner Resolutions ................................................................. 8-4
Line Art Scanning ............................................................. 8-4
Halftone Scanning ............................................................. 8-5
TIFF, PICT, EPS Formats ................................................. 8-5
Gamma Corrections ................................................................. 8-6
Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology ................................ 8-8
Enhanced Screening ................................................................. 8-9
Font Accelerator and RAM Disk ............................................. 8-9
Accurate Calibration Technology .......................................... 8-10
Appendix A ................................................................................... A-1
Appendix B ................................................................................... B-1
Glossary ........................................................................................ G-1
Index ...............................................................................................I-1
◊◊◊
xivbb ____________________________________________________
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Chapter Overview
The XANTÉ Accel-a-Writer 8300 .................................................. 1-3
About this Manual ........................................................................... 1-4
Manual Conventions ....................................................................... 1-5
Other Helpful Documentation ......................................................... 1-6
About Your Printer .......................................................................... 1-6
Printer Features ......................................................................... 1-8
PostScript Typefaces ................................................................. 1-9
About XANTÉ Utilities ................................................................ 1-10
Warranty and Product Registration ............................................... 1-10
_________________________________________ Introduction 1-1

Notes
1-2 Introductionbb ________________________________________

The XANTÉ Accel-a-Writer 8300
Fig. 1.1 XANTÉ Accel-a-Writer 8300
Your new Accel-a-Writer 8300 features Adobe PostScript 3. The

high quality laser prints are excellent for everyday office needs as
well as for the demanding field of desktop publishing.
_________________________________________ Introduction 1-3

About this Manual
This User’s Guide documents the installation, setup, and operation of
the Accel-a-Writer 8300.
Chapter 1—Introduction provides an overview of this manual, the

XANTÉ Utilities, your printer’s main features, and your printer
warranty.
Chapter 2—Installation provides instructions for unpacking and

setting up your printer, installing the paper handling and external
SCSI disk options, loading the toner and paper cassettes, and
connecting it to Macintosh and PC interfaces.
Chapter 3—Macintosh Setup describes the contents and use of the

XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM for the Macintosh. This includes
installation instructions for the Adobe PostScript printer drivers, your
printer’s PPD, XANTÉ Command Center, XANTÉ Linearizer, the
Adobe Downloader and procedures for using many of your printer’s
innovative features.
Chapter 4—PC Setup describes the contents and use of the

XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM for the PC. This includes installation
instructions for the Adobe PostScript printer drivers, your printer’s
PPD, XANTÉ Command Center, the XANTÉ Linearization Tool,
and procedures for using many of your printer’s innovative features.
Chapter 5—Configuration describes how to configure the default

settings for the printer features using the front panel keys and
configuration menus.
Chapter 6—PPD Settings describes the printer features that can be

set through an application’s Print dialog box using your printer’s
PPD (PostScript Printer Description file).
Chapter 7—Media and Toner describes how to select and use

various media types and sizes, how to print double-sided copies, and
how to handle your printer’s toner cartridge.
1-4 Introductionbb ________________________________________

Chapter 8—Advanced Features describes XANTÉ’s NEIT
(Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology), Halftone Calibration
Technology, Font Accelerator, Enhanced Screening, and X•ACT
(XANTÉ Accurate Calibration Technology) features.
Chapter 9—Maintenance and Technical Specifications describes

how to care for your printer and contains your printer’s technical
specifications and warranty.
Appendix A—Troubleshooting provides troubleshooting tips,

gives an overview of XANTÉ service options, and describes how to
reach XANTÉ Technical Support.
Appendix B—Application Notes and Page Design provides

instructions and tips for using the printer in mainstream application
environments and some general page design tips.
Glossary—defines many terms related to your printer, XANTÉ

utilities, and the printing industry.
The Accel-a-Writer 8300 Menu quick reference sheet illustrates

the printer’s front panel menu structure and lists XANTÉ support
resources.
Manual Conventions
The following conventions are used in this manual:
Courier indicates information you must type or which

displays on screen.
↵ indicates that you need to press the Return key

on a Macintosh or the Enter key on a PC.
Note: indicates additional or emphasized information.
Caution: indicates instructions which if not followed can

or will cause damage to files or equipment.
Warning! indicates instructions which must be followed

exactly or personal injury can occur.
_________________________________________ Introduction 1-5
Other Helpful Documentation
Please visit our Web site at www.xante.com for the latest
information about XANTÉ products and services.
You may find the following publications helpful when working with
Adobe PostScript printing.
PostScript Language Reference Manual, Second Edition. This manual,

published by Addison Wesley, is designed for advanced users, such as
programmers, who work with Adobe PostScript operators.
PostScript Language Tutorial and Cookbook. This manual,

published by Addison Wesley, is designed for those who want to
learn about working directly in the Adobe PostScript language.
Most bookstores and many computer businesses either keep these

books in stock or can order them for you.
About Your Printer

The Accel-a-Writer 8300’s high-end features allow you to produce
near typeset quality work, suitable for camera-ready production. The
standard, smooth 600 x 600 dpi resolution can be upgraded to 1200 x
1200 dpi.
Your printer features true Adobe PostScript 3, not an emulation.

Features such as the Smooth Shading operator, expanded font sets
for leading operating systems and applications, international font
support, and Advanced Page Processing provide fast, high quality
imaging on your XANTÉ printer.
XANTÉ’s patent pending Accurate Calibration Technology (X•ACT)

and optional Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology (NEIT) provide
greater control over printer output than previously available from a laser
printer. X•ACT allows you to calibrate the printer’s line lengths. NEIT
is the first technology to address the problems typically associated
producing negative images on a laser printer.
1-6 Introductionbb ________________________________________

The AMD 29040 33 MHz RISC processor, 8 MB RAM, and
XANTÉ’s technology help ensure fast, reliable, performance.
Memory upgrades provide the extra space required for higher
resolution and oversized printing.
Your Accel-a-Writer 8300 offers out-of-the-box advanced paper

handling capability. You can print on paper, film, transparencies,
labels, and envelopes. The printer features a standard input capacity
of 350 sheets—250 sheets in the standard paper cassette and 100
sheets in the manual feed tray. If you require a higher input capacity,
you can add up to two optional paper feeders, which can each
support an additional 250 sheet input cassette.
The cassettes support up to ledger/tabloid (11" x 17")/A3 size paper.

The manual feed tray supports media from 3.90" x 5.80" (99 mm x
147 mm) to 12.00" x 25.00" (305 mm x 635 mm). An upgrade is
available to expand print regions on oversized media.
The optional duplexer allows you to print automatically on both

sides of the paper, with a choice of edge (side-to-side, book style) or
tumble (flip chart) duplexing.
With simultaneously active serial, parallel, LocalTalk, and (optional)

Ethernet interfaces, Macintosh and PC computers can send files
concurrently to the Accel-a-Writer 8300. You do not have to send
software commands or manually set hardware switches to use a
different interface.
Used in conjunction with XANTÉ’s FilmStar 2, your Accel-a-Writer

8300 becomes a complete desktop pre-press film center. Use your
printer’s advanced imaging features to print high quality images
directly to XANTÉ’s Myriad Film. After processing through
FilmStar 2, the film can be used to burn metal plates or silk screen
emulsions.
_________________________________________ Introduction 1-7

Printer Features
Your versatile Accel-a-Writer 8300 printer offers many outstanding
features including the following:
• Standard 600 x 600 dpi resolution
•` Resolution upgrade—1200 x 1200 dpi*
• 8 page per minute engine speed
• AMD 29040/33 MHz RISC processor
• Adobe PostScript 3, including Smooth Shading and
Advanced Page Processing
• Up to ledger (11"x17")/A3 size regular paper handling
• Custom sized printing from 3.90" x 5.80" (99 mm x 147
mm) to 12.00" x 25.00" (305 mm x 635 mm) allowing full
bleed printing for 11" x 17" (279 mm x 432 mm)
documents*
• Extra Wide Print (optional) enlarges the print region on
12.00" x 25.00" (305 mm x 635 mm) media to 11.95" x
24.87" (304 mm x 632 mm)*
• 136 PostScript fonts
• Font Type 0, 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 42 support
• Simultaneously active serial, parallel, LocalTalk, and
(optional) Ethernet interfaces
• Ethernet (optional) to support EtherTalk, Novell NetWare
Print Server, and TCP/IP protocols
• SCSI disk interface
• Internal IDE disk (optional)
• XANTÉ Halftone Calibration Technology
• XANTÉ Enhanced Screening Technology
• XANTÉ Accurate Calibration Technology (X•ACT)
1-8 Introductionbb ________________________________________

• XANTÉ Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology (NEIT
[optional])
• 8 MB RAM, upgradeable to 128 MB RAM
• 2 standard input trays and optional cassettes
• Up to two additional Paper feeders (optional)
• Duplexer (optional)*
• XANTÉ Utilities (PC and Macintosh)
• Canon microfine toner
• Densitometer Support
• I/O Spooling
• Font Accelerator
• Mirror Print
• Negative Print
• Horizontal and Vertical Image Shift Features
* See the “Printer Memory Requirements” in chapter 9.
PostScript Typefaces
Your printer features 136 PostScript typefaces. These typefaces are
printer resident so they are available for fast access without
downloading. They are designed to work with the leading operating
systems including Windows 3.1, Windows 95, Windows NT, and
Macintosh OS. “Page Design” in appendix B provides information
about using typefaces to achieve a professional finish to your
documents.
_________________________________________ Introduction 1-9

About XANTÉ Utilities
The XANTÉ Utilities, shipped with your printer, include easy-to-
use, menu driven programs and files to make working with your new
printer more convenient. The CD-ROM contains the Adobe
PostScript Printer Drivers, PPDs for XANTÉ printers, special files
required for QuarkXPress and older versions of some Aldus
applications, and the XANTÉ Command Center and Linearizer
software packages, which allow advanced calibration and setup of
your printer.
Warranty and Product Registration

Chapter 10 contains the warranty on your Accel-a-Writer 8300
printer. Please be sure to return the warranty sheet included with
your printer package. Returning this sheet registers your printer and
entitles you to a free subscription to XANTÉ’s Accel-a-Writing
newsletter. Our publication features articles on printing, new options
as they become available, and tips for using your printer to the best
advantage.
◊◊◊
1-10 Introductionbb ________________________________________

Chapter 2 - Installation
Chapter Overview
Introduction ..................................................................................... 2-3
Printer Location .............................................................................. 2-3
Package Contents ............................................................................ 2-4
Unpacking the Printer ..................................................................... 2-5
Overview of the Accel-a-Writer 8300 ............................................. 2-7
Installing Options ............................................................................ 2-9
Controller Board Upgrades ...................................................... 2-9
Paper Handling Options ......................................................... 2-11
The Toner Cartridge ...................................................................... 2-24
The Paper Cassettes ...................................................................... 2-28
The Manual Feed Tray .................................................................. 2-32
Verify the Printer Setup ................................................................. 2-35
Connecting the Power Cord .................................................... 2-35
Starting the Printer .................................................................. 2-35
Reviewing the Start-up Page .................................................. 2-36
The Printer Interfaces .................................................................... 2-36
Connecting to a Macintosh ..................................................... 2-37
Connecting to a PC ................................................................. 2-38
Connecting an External SCSI Disk ........................................ 2-41
__________________________________________ Installation 2-1

Notes
2-2 Installationbb _________________________________________

Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up your new Accel-a-Writer 8300
printer. It includes finding the right location; unpacking the printer;
installing paper handling options, toner, and paper; connecting the
power cord; printing a start-up page; and connecting to an interface.
Printer Location
When choosing the location for your printer, find an area that
• Is level, sturdy, and capable of supporting approximately
44 lbs (19.98 kg)
• Has sufficient clearance for operation and maintenance
• Has a temperature range between 50˚ to 90.5˚ Fahrenheit
(10˚ to 32.5˚ Celsius) without rapid changes
• Has a relative humidity between 20% and 80%
• Is well ventilated
• Is away from direct sunlight, open flames, refrigerators,
water faucets, humidifiers, heaters, or similar equipment
• Is away from strong vibrations or electromagnetic fields
• Is close enough to the host computer to allow proper
communication: within 10 feet (3 m) for parallel; within
25 feet (7.5 m) for serial; within 1000 feet (305 m) for
LocalTalk
• Is close to a grounded electrical outlet with the proper
voltage
Note: Do not use ammonia-based cleaners on or around the

printer; they react chemically with the toner.
__________________________________________ Installation 2-3

Package Contents
Your printer package contains the following items:
• Accel-a-Writer 8300 printer
• 250 sheet cassette
• Power cord
• Accel-a-Writer 8300 User’s Guide (this manual)
• XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM, with the Adobe PostScript
Printer driver, PPDs, XANTÉ Command Center, XANTÉ
Linearizer, and other software
• Toner cartridge (EP-J)
Optional items from the following list ship separately.

• Additional 250 sheet paper cassettes
• Paper feeder (up to two can be added)
• Duplexer
Note: RAM, internal hard disk, print resolution, Ethernet,

NEIT, and extra wide print upgrades ordered with your
printer are installed at the factory before shipping.
If you do not receive your full shipment or if anything is damaged,

immediately contact XANTÉ Customer Support at 800-926-8393 in
the US and Canada or at 334-342-4846 elsewhere.
2-4 Installationbb _________________________________________

Unpacking the Printer
You may want to save the packing materials that protect your printer
during shipping to use if you have to move or ship the printer.
1. Remove everything except the printer in its protective bag

from the shipping box.
Warning! The printer weighs approximately 33 lbs (15 kg)

without the toner, cassettes, and media installed. Have
someone help you lift it.
2. Lift the printer out of the box.
3. Remove the plastic wrap from around the printer.
4. Remove the packing tape from the outside of the front manual
feed tray and the back cover.
5. Open the top cover by pressing the release latch on the right
side of the printer and tilting the cover up and back (fig. 2.1).
Fig. 2.1 Open the Top Cover
__________________________________________ Installation 2-5

6. Remove the tape, protective sheet, and the shipping spacers by
pulling them up and out of the printer (fig. 2.2).
Two Cardboard Shipping Spacers
Fig. 2.2 Remove the Two Cardboard Shipping Spacers
2-6 Installationbb _________________________________________

Overview of the Accel-a-Writer 8300
Before you begin this setup, take a few minutes to familiarize
yourself with the printer. Figures 2.3, 2.4, and 2.5 provide an
overview of the front, back, and inside of your printer.
Output Tray
Front Panel
Tabloid Extender
Top Cover
Tray Extender
Manual Feed Tray Top Cover Latch
Front Cover
Power Switch
Fig. 2.3 Front View of the Printer
__________________________________________ Installation 2-7

Paper Stop
Auxiliary Output Tray
Output Tray
Back Cover
Cassette
Power Receptacle
Fig. 2.4 Rear View of the Printer
Cleaning Brush
Toner Cartridge
Top Cover
Top Cover Latch
Front Cover
Fig. 2.5 Inner Front View of the Printer
2-8 Installationbb _________________________________________

Installing Options
You can order controller board upgrades and paper handling options
to enhance your printer’s performance. Controller board upgrades are
either factory installed or shipped with instructions. The paper
handling options are shipped separately and must be installed by the
user. This section describes these options, the procedures to receive
installation instructions or service for the controller board upgrades,
and instructions for installation of the paper handling options.
Controller Board Upgrades

If controller board upgrades are ordered with your printer, they are
installed at the factory before the printer is shipped. If ordered later,
Ethernet, internal hard disk, print resolution, and RAM upgrades are
shipped with installation and setup instructions; the extra wide print
and NEIT upgrades must be performed at the factory.
To return your printer for a NEIT or extra wide print upgrade, call
XANTÉ Technical Support for an RGA (Return Goods
Authorization) number. Printers without RGA numbers are not
accepted. You are responsible for shipping costs. You can reach
XANTÉ Technical Support at 800-926-8393 in the US and Canada
or at 334-342-4846 elsewhere from 7:00 a.m. until 7:00 p.m. Central
time Monday through Thursday or 7:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. on Friday.
Ethernet Upgrade
The Ethernet upgrade is designed to support EtherTalk, Novell
NetWare print server, and TCP/IP protocols in an Ethernet
environment on thinnet coax (10Base2) or twisted-pair (10BaseT).
XANTÉ’s EtherTalk interface is designed to work on EtherTalk
Phase 2 networks.
See the Ethernet Upgrade manual that is shipped with your upgrade
package for installation and setup instructions.
__________________________________________ Installation 2-9

Extra Wide Print Upgrade
The extra wide print option expands the imageable area of 12.00" x
19.00" and 12.00" x 25.00" size media.
Standard Extra Wide

Imageable Areas Imageable Areas
12.00" x 19.00" 11.63" x 18.87" 11.95" x 18.87"

(295 mm x 479 mm) (304 mm x 479 mm)
12.00" x 25.00" 11.63" x 24.87" 11.95" x 24.87"

(295 mm x 632 mm) (304 mm x 632 mm)
See chapter 7, “Media and Toner,” for details.
Internal Hard Disk Upgrade

The internal hard disk upgrade provides extra space to store
downloaded fonts and allows you to implement the spooling feature
on the printer’s interfaces. Your printer can support one internal hard
disk and up to seven external SCSI drives.
See “Connecting an External SCSI Disk” later in this chapter for

details.
NEIT Upgrade
The NEIT (Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology) upgrade helps
ensure clear crisp hairline images and text by minimizing plugging
on negative images.
See “The NEIT Menu” in chapter 5 and “Negative Enhanced

Imaging Technology” in chapter 8 for details.
Print Resolution Upgrade

The standard resolution of your Accel-a-Writer 8300 is 600 x 600
dpi. The resolution upgrade expands your printer’s resolution
capability to include 1200 x 1200 dpi.
2-10 Installationbb _________________________________________

Because your printer’s memory requirements increase when you
print at a higher resolution (see “Printer Memory Requirements” in
chapter 9), a resolution upgrade is customized for your needs and
usually includes the RAM upgrade required for your printing
environment. Call XANTÉ Technical Support Representative to
determine the correct configuration for your environment.
Note: If your printer is configured with 20 MB or more of RAM,

1200 dpi will appear in the DPI menu on the front panel.
However, unless the corresponding resolution upgrade has
been added to your printer, the copy will print incorrectly if
the higher resolution is selected.
See “The DPI Menu” in chapter 5 and “Resolution” in chapter 6 for

details.
RAM Upgrades
Your printer’s standard memory configuration is 8 MB of RAM.
This can be upgraded to a maximum of 128 MB using 4, 16, or 32
MB SIMMs. Additional RAM allows the printer to handle larger,
more complex graphics and text files, higher resolutions, and more
downloaded fonts.
See chapter 3 (Macintosh) or chapter 4 (PC) to configure the RAM

in the PPD. See “The RAM Disk Menu” in chapter 5 and “Font
Accelerator and RAM Disk” in chapter 8 to create and use a RAM
disk.
Paper Handling Options

The standard Accel-a-Writer 8300 comes with a 250 sheet cassette.
Up to two optional paper feeders and cassettes can be added to
increase the feeding capacity of the printer. See “Feeding Media to
the Printer” in chapter 7 and “The Paper Cassettes” later in this chapter
for details.
__________________________________________ Installation 2-11

The optional duplexer allows you to print on both sides of the paper.
You can choose edge (side-to-side, standard book style) or tumble
(flip chart style) duplexing. See “Duplexing” in chapter 7 for details.
Paper Feeder
You can install up to two additional paper feeders, each of which can
hold a 250 sheet cassette. The paper cassettes and manual feed tray
can be used to increase the capacity for a single media size with the
tray chaining option or as sources for different sizes or types of print
media. For example, to use both letter and ledger size media, load up
to 250 sheets of one size in the standard cassette and 250 sheets of
the other size in an optional cassette or the manual feed tray.
Installing the Paper Feeder
1. Unpack the paper feeder and, with the connector to the back
left, set the feeder next to the printer.
2. Turn off your printer and disconnect the power cord and all
interface cables.
Warning! The printer weighs approximately 33 lbs (15 kg)

without the toner, cassettes, and media installed. Have
3. Hold the printer above the feeder, making sure not to lift it by
the multipurpose feeder or the feed roller. Lower the printer
onto the feeder, aligning the feeder pegs with the printer
connectors (fig. 2.6).
2-12 Installationbb _________________________________________

Fig. 2.6 Align the Printer over the Feeder
4. Reconnect the power cord and all interface cables.
5. Set up the cassette for the size media you plan to use and load
it with up to 250 sheets of media. (See “The Paper Cassettes”
later in this chapter for details).
6. Slide the filled paper cassette into the feeder. Then, turn on
your printer.
__________________________________________ Installation 2-13

Duplexer
The duplexer allows you to print on both sides of the paper. You can
choose edge (side to side standard book style) or tumble (flip chart
style) duplexing. See chapter 7, “Duplexing,” for details on using the
duplexer and appendix A, “Troubleshooting,” to solve jam or print
quality problems.
The optional package includes the duplexer, a replacement back

cover for the printer, and a cable guide (fig. 2.7).
Release
Latches
Top
Back Unit Cover
Power
Receptacle
Connector
Cable
Slot
Aligning
Pointer
Ventilation
Slots
Replacement Back Cable Guide
Fig. 2.7 The Duplexer Package
2-14 Installationbb _________________________________________

Installing the Duplexer
The duplexer and printer should be installed in an operating
environment which meets the guidelines in “Printer Location” earlier
in this chapter.
To prepare the printer and replace its back cover
1. Turn off the printer and disconnect its power cord from the
printer and power source. Disconnect any attached interface
cables.
2. Remove the printer’s paper cassette and set it aside for now.
3. Open the printer’s back cover and locate the spacer. Tilt the
spacer up, pull it out (fig. 2.8), and keep it handy.
Fig. 2.8 Remove the Spacer
__________________________________________ Installation 2-15

4. Remove the printer’s back cover. First, push the cover slightly
to the left (fig. 2.9; 1); then gently pull it out from the right
side (fig. 2.9; 2).
Note: Store the original cover in a safe place so you can

replace it later if you remove the duplexer.
Fig. 2.9 Remove the Printer’s Back Cover
5. Install the replacement back cover (included with the duplexer).

First, insert the cover’s left bottom tab into the slot on the printer;
then, push the cover right as far as it can go (fig. 2.9).
6. Replace the spacer by positioning its bottom hook around the

cover’s left bottom tab and swinging the spacer down until it
snaps securely into the back cover (fig. 2.10).
Fig. 2.10 Replace the Spacer
2-16 Installationbb _________________________________________

To mount the printer on the duplexer
1. Unpack the duplexer, making sure to remove all the shipping

materials including the polystyrene, tape, plastic bags, and
cardboard. (See the included instructions for unpacking).
Warning: The printer weighs approximately 33 lbs (15 kg)

without the toner, cassette, and media installed. Have
2. Move the printer to the side to make room for the duplexer.
Caution: Always use the hollowed hand grip areas when picking
up the duplexer (fig. 2.11). Never move it with the
printer attached.
3. Hold the duplexer by the hand grip areas and place it where the
printer had been.
Fig. 2.11 Pick up the Duplexer
__________________________________________ Installation 2-17

4. Pull up the back cover release latch and slide the back unit
open as far as it will go (fig. 2.12).
Fig. 2.12 Open the Back Unit
Warning! Make sure to use both the top cover and back cover
latches. If only the green top cover latch is pulled, the
unit can fall and cause personal injury or damage the
equipment.
5. Remove the back unit by pulling up both the top cover and
back cover latches and lifting the unit straight up (fig. 2.13).
Fig. 2.13 Remove the Back Unit
6. Move the duplexer’s power cable to the side to prevent it from

catching on the printer during installation (fig. 2.14).
2-18 Installationbb _________________________________________

Fig. 2.14 Move the Power Cable to the Side

without the toner, cassette, and media installed. Have
7. Hold the printer above the duplexer, making sure not to lift it
by the multipurpose feeder or the feed roller. Lower the printer
onto the duplexer, aligning the duplexer pegs with the printer
connectors (fig. 2.15).
Fig. 2.15 Align the Printer over the Duplexer
__________________________________________ Installation 2-19

8. Connect the duplexer’s power cable to the printer’s power
receptacle (fig. 2.16).
Fig. 2.16 Connect the Duplexer Power Cable to the Printer.
9. Position the cable guide as shown in figure 2.17. Then, push

the guide into the back cover bars and lower it into place.
Fig. 2.17 Attach the Cable Guide
2-20 Installationbb _________________________________________

10. Plug the interface cable into the back of the printer (fig. 2.18; 1).
Then, as you face the back of the printer, pull the interface cable
close to the printer to the right, and place it in the cable rest (fig.
2.18; 2).
1
2
Fig. 2.18 Plug in the Interface Cable
11. Align the back unit over the rear of the duplexer, making sure
the pointers line up; pull up the back unit’s top and back cover
latches; then, lower it onto the duplexer (fig. 2.19).
Note: Make certain the duplexer back unit fits against the
printer. A gap may cause a paper jam or output not to
duplex and either Cover Open or Paper Jam to
appear in the window.
Fig. 2.19 Attach the Back Unit to the Duplexer
__________________________________________ Installation 2-21

12. Make certain the paper cassette cover is in place to prevent the
possibility of a paper jam (fig. 2.29). Then, slide the cassette
into the printer until it snaps in place.
13. Plug the printer’s power cord into the duplexer’s power
receptacle and into the power source. Then, turn the printer on.
Removing the Duplexer
1. Turn off the printer, disconnect the power cord from the power
supply and the duplexer.
2. Remove the paper cassette by pulling it straight out of the

printer.
3. Pull up the back cover release latch and slide the back unit
open as far as it will go; then, remove the back unit by pulling
up both the top and back cover latches, and lifting the unit
straight up (fig. 2.20).
Fig. 2.20 Remove the Back Unit
4. Disconnect the interface cables from the printer and lift them
out of the cable rest (fig. 2.18).
5. Remove the cable guide by lifting it up and gently pulling it

out of printer (fig. 2.17).
6. Disconnect the duplexer’s power cord from the printer (fig. 2.16).
2-22 Installationbb _________________________________________

without the toner, media, and cassette installed. Have
7. Hold the printer as shown in figure 2.15 and lift it up and off
the duplexer.
8. Realign the back unit over the rear of the duplexer, making sure
the pointers line up; pull up the back unit’s top and back cover
latches; then, lower the unit onto the duplexer (fig. 2.19).
9. Hold the back cover latch up (open) while you slide the back
unit until it closes firmly into place.
10. Remove the back replacement cover from the printer by

pushing it left slightly, and then gently pulling it out from the
right side first (fig. 2.9).
11. Replace the printer’s original back cover by inserting the

cover’s left bottom tab into the slot on the printer, and then
pushing it right as far as it will go.
12. Replace the spacer by positioning its bottom hook around the
cover’s left bottom tab and swinging the spacer down until it
snaps securely into the back cover (fig. 2.10).
13. Close the printer’s back cover and place the paper cassette
back into the printer.
14. Reattach the interface and power cables to the printer.
15. Plug the printer’s power cable into the power source.
Storing the Duplexer

Store the duplexer with the replacement back cover and cable guide
in its original box with the packing materials around it. The storage
location should maintain a 10˚ to 35˚ C (50˚ to 95˚ F) temperature
and a 10% to 80% relative humidity.
__________________________________________ Installation 2-23

The Toner Cartridge
Your Accel-a-Writer 8300 ships with an EP-J toner cartridge. This
cartridge combines the toner and drum, so that you only have to
replace one consumable. The EP-J cartridge averages 8000 letter/A4
size copies at 4% coverage.
Caution: The toner cartridge is sensitive to bright lights and direct

sunlight. Leave it in its protective bag until you are
ready to load it into the printer. To prevent data loss or
equipment damage, keep the cartridge, which contains a
magnet, away from your hard disk(s) and monitor.
This section describes how to remove an old toner cartridge and

install a new one. See chapter 7, “Media and Toner,” for information
about adjusting toner density.
Caution: Never move or ship the printer with a toner cartridge

installed. Toner spills can damage the printer.
1. Open the top cover by pressing the release latch and tilting the
cover up and back (fig. 2.1).
2. Grasp the old toner cartridge in the center, pull it up and out
(fig. 2.21), and dispose of it following safety laws and
regulations.
Warning! The toner is highly combustible. Never dispose of it by

incineration.
2-24 Installationbb _________________________________________

Fig. 2.21 Remove the Toner Cartridge
3. Locate the static charge eliminator (fig. 2.22) and clean it

using the green cleaning brush (located inside the top cover
area on the left). To do this, gently run the brush back and
forth across the eliminator several times.
Fig. 2.22 Clean the Static Charge Eliminator
__________________________________________ Installation 2-25

4. Locate the transfer guide and clean off the dust and paper
residue by wiping the area with a soft, dry, lint-free, clean
cloth (fig. 2.23).
Fig. 2.23 Clean the Transfer Guide
5. Remove the toner cartridge from its package. Gently rock it back
and forth to distribute toner throughout the cartridge (fig. 2.24).
Fig. 2.24 Distribute the Toner
6. Gently pull off the tab labeled “Remove the black sheet
slowly” and discard it (fig. 2.25).
2-26 Installationbb _________________________________________

7. Gently, flex the orange tab on the end of the sealing tape. Pull the
the tab and tape from the toner cartridge and discard it (fig. 2.25).
Fig. 2.25 Remove the Toner Sealing Tape
8. Align the toner cartridge on the runners; then, slide the cartridge
into the printer until it rests securely in place (fig. 2.26).
Fig. 2.26 Load the Toner Cartridge
9. Close the printer’s top cover until it clicks in place.
__________________________________________ Installation 2-27

The Paper Cassettes
One 250 sheet paper cassette ships with your printer. The North
American paper cassette is set up to feed letter, legal, 11" x 17", and
executive paper sizes. The international paper cassette is set up to
feed A4, A3, A5, B4, and B5 paper sizes. Additional cassettes and
optional paper feeders can be ordered for your printer (see “Paper
Feeder” earlier in this chapter).
This section describes how to install and load the North American
paper cassette. See chapter 7 for information about selecting and
using various media types and sizes.
1. Unpack the paper cassette by removing the spacer from the

cassette. Then remove the filament tape and plastic bag from
the cassette cover.
2. Configure the cassette for the correct media size. On the front
of the paper cassette are illustrations of this process (fig. 2.27).
b
a
1
2
3
LT
R
4
Fig. 2.27 Configure the Cassette Media Size
2-28 Installationbb _________________________________________

a. Make sure the size indicator label on the front of the
cassette displays the correct setting. The green dial on
the top left at the front of the cassette controls the label.
To change this setting, roll the green dial forward until
the correct size appears on the label (fig. 2.27; a).
The green dial changes the size indicator label and sets
keys that notify the printer engine of the media size
configuration. This dial has three settings that can be used
for letter (LTR), and one setting each for executive (EXE),
legal (LGL), and 11" x 17" paper sizes.
Note: If this setting is incorrect, printing errors can

occur or the image may be printed incorrectly
on the media.
b. Make sure the pointer on the right media guide is set for
the correct media size. To change this setting, adjust the
two green side guides (fig 2.27; b).
c. Make sure the back media guide is set for the correct
media size (fig. 2.27; c). To change this setting, tilt the
bar forward to free the three bottom tabs; then, lift out
the bar. With the bar still tilted forward, align it over the
correct setting, slide the tabs into the slots, and tilt the
bar upright into position.
__________________________________________ Installation 2-29

3. Prepare up to 250 sheets (approximately 1" [25 mm] thick or
less) of 20 lb bond/60 lb text weight paper following the
recommendations in “The Paper Cassettes” in chapter 7:
4. Slide the paper printing side down, leading edge first, under
the two clips on each end of the media bar and under the two
clips at the front corners of the side guides (fig. 2.28).
Caution: Make sure the paper stack does not exceed the
upper paper limit marked on the media bar (fig.
2.28). Overloading a cassette causes paper jams.
Paper Limit Marks
LT
R
Fig. 2.28 Load the Paper Cassette
2-30 Installationbb _________________________________________

5. Align the cassette cover over the back of the cassette (fig.
2.29) and lower it into place.
LT
R
Fig. 2.29 Install the Cassette Cover
6. Slide the cassette into the printer until it snaps into place.
__________________________________________ Installation 2-31

7. Extend the auxiliary output tray when using legal, 11" x 17",
and A3 paper.
Auxiliary Output Tray

Paper Stop
Release Area
Fig. 2.30 Open the Auxiliary Output Tray
a. Open the auxiliary output tray by pressing down on the

release area (fig. 2.30).
b. Pull out the paper tray extension, and flip the paper stop
up and into place.
8. Select the paper cassette as the media source using the Tray
Select key or the Tray Switch menu on the printer’s front
panel. The media source also can be selected using the Print
dialog box in your application.
The Manual Feed Tray

Your printer’s built-in manual feed tray is designed to feed up to 100
sheets of 20 lb bond/60 lb text weight paper, up to 25 sheets of Myriad
Film, up to 50 transparencies, or up to 40 sheets of labels. It supports
non-standard size media, including envelopes, that measure from 3.90"
x 5.80" (99 mm x 147 mm) up to 12.00" x 25.00" (305 mm x 635 mm).
This section describes how to load the manual feed tray. See chapter 7
for information about selecting and using various media types and sizes
in the manual feed tray.
2-32 Installationbb _________________________________________

1. Open the manual feed tray by grasping the hand grip and
pulling out and down (fig. 2.31 ).
Fig. 2.31 Open the Manual feed Tray
2. Remove the shipping cardboard covering the tray extenders

when first setting up the printer.
3. Open the tray extender by grasping it in the center and pulling

out until it snaps up into place. For large media, open the
tabloid extender by pushing it up from the bottom and flipping
it over into place (fig. 2.32).
Tabloid Extender
Tray Extender
Fig. 2.32 Pull Out the Tray and Tabloid Extenders
__________________________________________ Installation 2-33

4. Prepare media following the recommendations in “The Manual
Feed Tray” in chapter 7 (approximately 3/8" [9 mm] or less).
5. Slide the media into the manual feed tray with the printing side
up, leading edge first (fig. 2.33).
Caution: Make sure the paper stack does not exceed the
upper paper limit indicated by tabs on the tray’s
side paper guides (fig. 2.33). Overloading the tray
may cause paper jams.
Paper Guides
Paper Limit Mark
Paper Limit Mark
Fig. 2.33 Load the Manual feed Tray
6. Adjust the paper guides on each side so they rest lightly

against the paper without causing it to buckle (fig. 2.33).
7. Adjust the paper stop on the output tray if you are using
oversized paper (fig. 2.30).
2-34 Installationbb _________________________________________

8. Select the manual feed tray as the media source using the Tray
Select key or the Tray Switch menu on the printer’s front
panel. The media source also can be selected using the Print
dialog box in your application.
Verify the Printer Setup

Check the printer setup by starting the printer and reviewing the
start-up page that automatically prints.
Connecting the Power Cord

The power receptacle is on the back of the printer at the lower left.
1. Make sure the printer’s power switch is off (the O is pressed in).
2. Connect the female end of the power cord to the printer.
3. Connect the male end of the power cord to a standard electrical

outlet (grounded AC outlet).
Note: You may want to use a surge protected outlet to help prevent
fluctuations in the power source from damaging your printer.
Starting the Printer

The power switch is on the front of the printer in the lower right
corner.
1. Locate the power switch.
2. Press the | on the power switch to turn on the printer. The

green Ready light flashes and Accel-a-Writer appears in the
display window.
__________________________________________ Installation 2-35

After the printer is powered on, it takes approximately 90 seconds for it
to run initialization programs and self-tests. After this warm-up, the
Ready light stops flashing and remains on and the start-up page
automatically prints.
If your printer does not power on when you turn the switch on, check
to be sure the power cord is properly attached and the power switch
is ON (the | side of the switch is depressed).
Reviewing the Start-up Page

Each time you turn on the printer, a start-up page prints after the
initialization period unless you disable this feature.
Review this page to be sure that the correct resolution, installed RAM,
and optional hard disks are recognized by the printer. The start-up page
also lists the printer’s name, page count, enabled interfaces, and network
information (if the Ethernet upgrade is installed).
See “The Startup Page Menu” in chapter 5 and chapter 3 (Macintosh) or

chapter 4 (PC) to control the start-up page feature.
The Printer Interfaces

Once the printer is set up, select the interface to connect the printer to
your computer or network. Your Accel-a-Writer 8300 has four standard
interface ports on the back—LocalTalk, serial, parallel, and a SCSI port.
An Ethernet port can be added as an option. Because these interfaces are
simultaneously active, the printer can receive jobs from different
operating environments without hardware switching.
SCSI Parallel Ethernet Serial LocalTalk
Fig. 2.34 Accel-a-Writer 8300 Ports
2-36 Installationbb _________________________________________

The port you select to connect your printer to your computer depends on
your computer type, the available ports, your software applications, and
your network environment.
Instructions for connecting and configuring the interfaces in

Macintosh and PC environments are in this chapter. For information
about connecting and configuring the Ethernet port, see the Ethernet
Upgrade manual that is shipped with the upgrade package.
Connecting to a Macintosh
In a Macintosh environment without Ethernet, your host computer
communicates with the printer via the LocalTalk port. You need two
LocalTalk connector boxes with DIN-8 connectors, a standard phone
cable (RJ-11), and two terminators.
DIN-8 Connector
RJ-11 Cable
Connector Terminating Connector

Box Resistor Box
Fig. 2.35 LocalTalk Connector Boxes, Resistors, and Cable
To connect your printer via the LocalTalk port
1. Turn off your printer and your computer.
2. Plug the DIN-8 connector on one LocalTalk connector box

into the printer’s 8-pin LocalTalk port.
3. Plug the DIN-8 connector on the second LocalTalk connector

box into the Macintosh’s printer port (refer to your Apple
Macintosh manual).
4. Connect the two LocalTalk connector boxes with the RJ-11

phone cable.
__________________________________________ Installation 2-37

5. Plug the terminating resistor(s) into the open socket(s) in the
connector box(es) (fig. 2.35).
Note: Be sure to terminate the open sockets on the ends of your

LocalTalk network with the terminators supplied with
your LocalTalk connectors (fig. 2.35). (There should
only be two open sockets on the network, one at each
end.) Closing open sockets helps speed data transmission
and helps ensure the printer is available in the Chooser.
6. Turn on the printer and computer.
7. Install and configure the printer driver and PPD following the
procedures in chapter 3, “Macintosh Setup.”
Connecting to a PC
In a PC environment without Ethernet, your host computer
communicates with the printer via the parallel or serial port.
Use the parallel port if your computer has a Centronics parallel port
available and is within 10 ft. (3 m) of the printer. Use the serial port
if a parallel port is not available or if the computer is between 10 ft.
(3 m) and 25 ft. (7.6 m) from the printer.
Connecting to the Parallel Port

Use a standard Centronics parallel cable to connect your computer
and printer (fig. 2.36). The parallel cable has a 36-pin male
connector to attach to the printer and a 25-pin male connector to
attach to the computer.
36-pin Connector 25-pin Connector
To Printer To Host Computer
Fig. 2.36 The Parallel Cable
2-38 Installationbb _________________________________________

To connect your printer and computer using the parallel port
1. Turn off your printer and computer.
2. Plug the 36-pin connector end of the cable into the printer’s
parallel port (fig. 2.34).
3. Plug the 25-pin end of the cable into the computer’s parallel port.
4. Turn on your computer and then the printer.
procedures in chapter 4, “PC Setup.”
Connecting to the Serial Port

Use a standard serial cable to connect your computer and printer (fig.
2.37). This cable has either a 9-pin or 25-pin female connector to
attach to the computer and a 9-pin male connector to attach to the
printer.
25-pin
Connector to Printer: 9-pin Connector to PC: or
9-pin
Fig. 2.37 The Serial Cables
__________________________________________ Installation 2-39

To connect your printer and computer using the serial port
1. Turn the power off to your printer and computer.
2. Plug the 9-pin male connector on the serial cable into the
printer’s serial port.
3. Plug the other connector (either a 25-pin or a 9-pin female

connector) into the computer’s serial port.
4. Turn on your computer and then the printer.
procedures in chapter 4, “PC Setup.”
Before you print, make sure your computer and printer are set to use
the same baud rate, flow control and parity settings.
The factory default printer settings are 9600 baud, XON/XOFF flow
control, No Parity (None), and 8 data bits. These settings are used in
most serial printing environments.
See your computer manual for details on checking and changing

settings. You can check and change the printer’s serial interface
settings using the front panel menus (see “Selecting Menu Options”
in chapter 5).
Baud Rate
Baud rate is the rate at which serial data is sent between the computer
and the printer. Your printer supports 1200, 9600, and 19200 baud rates.
The factory default is 9600.
Flow Control
Flow control is the mechanism the printer uses to signal the
computer that it is ready to accept data. Your printer supports
XON/XOFF (software) and DTR/DSR (hardware) flow control.
XON/XOFF is the printer’s factory default. Incorrect flow control
settings cause erratic serial printing.
2-40 Installationbb _________________________________________

Parity
Parity is used to check for transmission errors by comparing the
group of data bits sent to the group received. A loss of data during
transmission usually results in a change to the group size. Your
printer supports five parity settings, None, Even, Odd, Mark, and
Space. The factory default is None.
Connecting an External SCSI Disk

You printer can support up to seven external SCSI disks and one
internal IDE disk. A hard disk allows you to download fonts to the
printer and to take advantage of the printer’s spooling feature. A 20
MB external SCSI disk can store approximately 500 to 600 fonts.
To connect an external SCSI disk to your printer, use a SCSI

peripheral cable (25-pin to 50-pin). If the disk is not internally
terminated, you also need an external SCSI terminator. See the SCSI
disk documentation for termination characteristics.
Connecting an External SCSI Disk to the Printer

SCSI disks are identified by device numbers such as the example in
figure 2.38. Each SCSI disk in a chain must have a unique number.
Usually, the disk number or ID is set using a switch on the back of
the SCSI disk.
Disk 1 Disk 2 Disk 3 Disk 4 Disk 5 Disk 6
Fig. 2.38 SCSI Disk Device Numbers
Caution: Do not turn on the printer or any attached SCSI disk until
the disk has been assigned a number. See your SCSI disk
documentation for details on assigning this number.
__________________________________________ Installation 2-41

To connect an external SCSI disk to your printer
1. Make sure the printer and the disk are turned off.
2. If the disk is not internally terminated, install the external SCSI

terminator following the instructions included with the hard
disk.
3. Plug the 25-pin male connector of the SCSI cable into the
printer’s SCSI port and the 50-pin connector into the
computer’s SCSI port following the instructions included with
the hard disk.
4. Turn on the SCSI disk first and wait a few seconds for it to spin
up. Then, turn on the printer. This ensures that the printer will
recognize the SCSI disk. The ID numbers and sizes of the SCSI
disks attached to the printer are listed on the start-up page.
5. Check the start-up page or print a test page to be sure the SCSI
disk is listed with the proper device number and disk size.
Initializing a Hard Disk

A hard disk must be initialized before it can be used to store
downloaded fonts or to set up a spooling queue.
Caution: Initializing a disk erases all information stored on it.

Make sure you select the correct printer and use the
correct PostScript file when initializing a hard disk.
The XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM contains several PostScript files

(InitdskX.ps) that can be downloaded to initialize your printer’s hard
disk(s):
• The numbered files initialize the SCSI disk with the same device
number (Initdsk1.ps intializes SCSI disk #1, Initdsk2.ps
initializes SCSI disk #2, etc.) on the printer.
• The Initdska.ps and Initdskb.ps files initialize the IDE drive
designated as A or B, respectively, on the printer.
• The Initdsks.ps file initializes all SCSI and IDE drives attached
to the printer.
2-42 Installationbb _________________________________________

Initializing a Hard Disk with a Macintosh
1. Select the correct file for the disk that you want to initialize
from the Downloads folder on the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM.
2. Download the file to your printer using the Download

PostScript File menu in either XANTÉ Command Center or
Adobe Downloader (see chapter 3, “Macintosh Setup” for
details).
Initializing a Hard Disk with the PC
1. Select the correct file for the disk that you want to initialize
from the PS_files folder on the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM.
2. Download the file to your printer using the Send PostScript

File option of the General menu in XANTÉ Command Center
(see chapter 4, “PC Setup” for details).
◊◊◊
__________________________________________ Installation 2-43

2-44 Installationbb _________________________________________
Chapter 3 - Macintosh Setup
Chapter Overview
Introduction ..................................................................................... 3-3
Before You Begin ............................................................................ 3-3
XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM for the Macintosh ............................... 3-3
XANTÉ Utilities Installer ............................................................... 3-5
Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0 .............................................................. 3-9
Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers .................................................... 3-9
Selecting the Adobe PostScript Printer Driver ......................... 3-9
PSPrinter 8.3.1 ........................................................................ 3-11
AdobePS 8.5.1 ........................................................................ 3-14
Configuring the PPD .............................................................. 3-16
Configuring the Printer ........................................................... 3-19
Downloads Folder ......................................................................... 3-20
App Drivers Folder ....................................................................... 3-22
Aldus APD Folder .................................................................. 3-22
Aldus PPD Folder ................................................................... 3-23
QuarkXPress PDF Folder ....................................................... 3-23
XANTÉ Command Center ............................................................ 3-24
The General Menu .................................................................. 3-24
The Networking Menu ........................................................... 3-27
The Color Menu ..................................................................... 3-28
XANTÉ Linearizer ........................................................................ 3-29
Adobe Downloader ....................................................................... 3-30
The File Menu ........................................................................ 3-30
The Special Menu ................................................................... 3-31
Procedures ..................................................................................... 3-31
The Spooler ............................................................................ 3-32
Calibration with a Densitometer ............................................. 3-36
Accurate Calibration Technology ........................................... 3-40
Printer Margin Adjustment ..................................................... 3-42
Downloaded Fonts .................................................................. 3-44
_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-1

Notes
3-2 Macintosh Setupbb ____________________________________

Introduction
This chapter describes the contents and use of the XANTÉ Utilities
CD-ROM for Macintosh. This includes instructions for installing
and configuring the Adobe PostScript printer driver, your printer’s
PPD (PostScript Printer Description) file, XANTÉ Command
Center, XANTÉ Linearizer, and the Adobe Downloader. The
procedures section contains instructions for using some of your
printer’s innovative features.
Before You Begin

You should be familiar with all standard Macintosh procedures. This
includes how to click, drag, copy, choose commands, select options,
use buttons and boxes, locate files, and scroll. If you have questions
on any of these procedures, see your Macintosh documentation.
XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM (Macintosh)

The XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM, shipped with your printer, includes
Adobe PostScript printer drivers, PPDs, XANTÉ Utilities, PostScript
files, and other programs to help you setup, customize, and troubleshoot
your printer. This section briefly describes the main folders in the
Macintosh section of the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM.
The Accel-a-Graphix folder contains CRDs, ICC profiles, and default

curves for use with XANTÉ’s Accel-a-Graphix CT4.
The Acrobat folder contains an Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0 Installer and
a ReadMe-Reader file that describes the system requirements and use of
Acrobat Reader 3.0. See “Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0” later in this
chapter.
The App Drivers folder contains printer drivers required by some

Aldus products and QuarkXPress. See “App Drivers Folder” later in
this chapter for details.
_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-3

The ATM 4.0.2 folder contains an installation program and user guide
for the Adobe Type Manager. To install, open the Adobe 4.0.2 Installer
folder in the ATM 4.0.2 folder and double-click on the installation icon.
The user guide can be viewed and printed using Adobe Reader 3.0,
provided on the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM.
The ATM-J Upgrade folder contains an installation program and

associated files for a Kanji upgrade of Adobe Type Manager.
The Downloads folder contains PostScript files that can be downloaded

to your printer using XANTÉ Command Center or the Adobe
Downloader. See the Overview.PDF file in the Downloads folder on the
CD-ROM and “Downloads Folder” later in this chapter.
The NetPeeks folder contains self-extracting files for two network

utility programs and the associated documentation. EtherHelp 3.1
(EtherHelp.sea) is used to capture packets on an Ethernet network.
LocalHelp 2.0 is used to capture packets on a LocalTalk network.
Double-click on each icon to install that utility on your Macintosh. Read
all documentation that is installed with the software before using these
programs.
The PostScript 3 Fonts folder contains the screen fonts used by

XANTÉ PostScript 3 printers for display on Macintosh screens and an
installation program. On Macintosh operating system prior to 8.0, you
must remove some of these fonts to reduce the number in your Fonts
folder to 128 or less.
The Printer Drivers folder contains the Adobe PostScript drivers,

XANTÉ PPDs, and installation programs for Roman and Kanji font
printers.
The Xnstaller launches the installation program for the most recent
version of the Adobe PostScript Printer Driver if you select a printer
installation. If you prefer to use the earlier Adobe PostScript Printer
Driver, these files can be loaded individually. See the Readme.PDF file
on the CD-ROM and “Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers” later in this
chapter for details.
The Product Manuals folder contains PDF files of the current versions
of the manuals for XANTÉ printers. These manuals can be viewed on
screen or printed using Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0.
The Read1st.txt text file describes how to install Adobe Acrobat
Reader 3.0 from the CD-ROM.
The Readme.PDF file provides an overview of the Macintosh section

of the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM. This file can be opened using
Acrobat Reader 3.0.
The Screen Fonts folder contains the fonts used by XANTÉ PostScript
Level 2 printers for display on Macintosh screens. If you do not already
have these fonts, copy this folder into the System: Fonts folder on your
Macintosh.
The XANTÉ Utilities folder contains XANTÉ Command Center,

XANTÉ Linearizer, Adobe Downloader, and a Downloader Read Me
file. See “XInstaller” and the individual utility sections later in this
chapter for details.
XInstaller is an installation program for XANTÉ Command Center,

XANTÉ Linearizer, Adobe Downloader, PostScript PPDs for your
printer, and the appropriate PDF (Printer Description File) for
QuarkXPress (if it is installed on your system). XInstaller can be
configured to launch the AdobePS Printer Driver Installer when the
XANTÉ Utilities installation is complete. See “XInstaller” later in this
chapter.
Always check the Readme files on the CD-ROM for information that
was not available at the time this manual was printed.
XInstaller
XInstaller can be configured to install only the XANTÉ Utilities or to
install the utilities, your printer’s PPD, your printer’s QuarkXPress PDF
(if QuarkXPress is installed on your system), and launch the AdobePS
8.5.1 driver installer.
1. Insert the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM into your Macintosh.

XInstaller is launched automatically. To start the program
manually, open the XANTE Utilities folder on the CD-ROM
and double-click the XInstaller icon.
_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-5

2. Click Continue to begin the installation.
3. Read the welcome note; then click Continue to bring up the

XInstaller screen (fig. 3.1).
Fig. 3.1 The XInstaller Screen
4. To start XInstaller, configure the installation options (see list

below); then, click Install. To exit the installation program
without installing any files, click Quit.
Installation options:
• Select the XANTÉ Utilities option to install only the
utilities (XANTÉ Command Center, XANTÉ Linearizer,
and the Adobe Downloader). Use this option if you want
to use PSPrinter 8.3.1 instead of AdobePS 8.5.1 (see
“Selecting the Adobe PostScript Printer Driver” later in
this chapter).
• Select one or more of the XANTÉ printer options to install
the utilities, the PPD(s) and the QuarkXPress PDF(s) for
the selected printers; then launch the AdobePS Installer,
which installs the AdobePS 8.5 printer driver.

• If necessary, change the destination disk or folder used by
the installation program from the Install Location box in
the lower left of the screen.
5. After the XANTÉ Utilities are installed, select Continue and

repeat steps 3 and 4 to install additional components or select
Quit and go to the appropriate section from the following list
for the type of installation you chose.
• If you chose the XANTÉ Utilities option, go to “Adobe
PostScript Printer Drivers” later in this chapter to load the
printer driver and your printer’s PPD.
• If you chose to install one or more printers and if the
AdobePS 8.5.1 printer driver is not currently installed on
your Macintosh, go to step 6 to proceed with the AdobePS
8.5.1 Installation.
• If you chose to install one or more printers and the
AdobePS 8.5.1 printer driver is already installed on your
Macintosh, follow the procedures in “Configuring the
Printer” and “Configuring the PPD” later in this chapter to
complete the setup.
6. Click Continue in the AdobePS 8.5.1 entry screen.
7. Read the license agreement and select Accept to bring up the

installation screen (fig. 3.2). If you select Decline, the
installation terminates.
_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-7

Fig. 3.2 AdobePS Installation Screen
8. If necessary, change the destination disk for the driver in the

Install Location box; then click Install. Follow the instructions
on screen. When the installation is complete, the following
screen appears.
Fig. 3.3 Installation Successful Screen
9. Click Restart to complete the installation.
10. Complete the setup after your Macintosh restarts following the
procedures in “Configuring the Printer” and “Configuring the
PPD” later in this chapter.

Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0
The documentation on the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM is in the
Adobe Acrobat Portable Document Format (PDF). You can install
Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0 from the CD-ROM.

The XInstaller is launched automatically.
2. Click Continue in the first two screens to bring up the

XInstaller screen (fig. 3.1); then, click Quit to exit the
Installation program.
3. Double-click the XANTÉ Utilities 4.0 icon; then, double-click

the Acrobat icon.
4. Check the ReadMe-Reader file; then, double-click the Reader

3.0 Installer icon to install Acrobat Reader 3.0.
Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers

Before using your printer, you must install and configure the Adobe
PostScript printer driver and your printer’s PPD on your Macintosh.
Selecting the Adobe PostScript Printer Driver

The XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM contains the Adobe PSPrinter 8.3.1
driver and the AdobePS 8.5.1 printer driver. Select the driver that
best fits your system setup and printing requirements.
Adobe PSPrinter 8.3.1

The Adobe PSPrinter driver requires the following system setup:
• Macintosh running System 7 or later (PSPrinter does not run on
the Macintosh 128K, 512K, or 512Ke computers)
• A minimum of 4 MB of memory
_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-9

• A minimum of 700 K of hard disk space plus the space required
for the PPDs
• Chooser version 7.3 or later (supplied with the PSPrinter
installation)
PSPrinter 8.3.1 provides the following features:

• Support for Adobe PostScript Level 2
• Full support for ColorSync 2.0
• Improved speed when printing JPEG compressed images
• Ability to save print options for subsequent jobs
The AdobePS 8.5.1

The AdobePS printer driver requires the following system setup:
• Macintosh running System 7.1 or later (AdobePS does not run
on the Macintosh 128K, 512K, or 512Ke computers)
• A minimum of 4 MB of memory
• A minimum of 2 MB of hard disk space plus the space required
for the PPDs
• Chooser version 7.3 or later (supplied with the PSPrinter
installation)
AdobePS 8.5.1 provides the following features:

• Support for Adobe PostScript 3 and Adobe PostScript Level 2
• Full support for ColorSync 2.1
• Simplified printer setup and printing interface
• Ability to change printers from within the Print dialog box
• Single-pass foreground printing, which provides faster printing
of large or complex documents

PSPrinter 8.3.1
The PSPrinter installation program loads PSPrinter 8.3.1, Chooser
version 7.3 (if necessary), the PSPrinter Read Me, and the latest
PPDs. The installation overwrites any earlier version of PSPrinter
but will not overwrite other printer drivers.
Installing PSPrinter 8.3.1 and the PPD

The installer loads both the PSPrinter driver and the PPD for the
XANTÉ printer into the appropriate folders on your Macintosh.


3. Double-click the XANTÉ Utilities 4.0 icon.
4. Double-click the Printer Drivers icon; then double-click the

PSPrinter 8.3.1 icon.
5. Double-click the appropriate language folder; then

double-click the Installer icon.
_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-11

6. Click OK in the Adobe Printer Driver entry screen to bring up
the PSPrinter Installation window.
Fig. 3.4 PSPrinter Installation Window
5. Click Install to load the files listed in the Easy Install box. If
you prefer to load only specific components, click Customize;
select the files to load; then click Install.
6. Read the license agreement and select Accept to bring up the

installation screen. If you select Decline, the installation
terminates.
7. Follow the instructions on screen to complete the installation.
8. Read the message in the Congratulations box; then click OK.
9. Click Quit to leave the installation program.
The Adobe PSPrinter driver and your printer’s PPD are installed.
Use the procedure in “Configuring the PPD” later in this chapter to
complete the driver setup.

PSPrinter 8.3 User Guide
A User Guide for the Adobe PSPrinter 8.3 print driver and a
README file are provided in each language directory in the
PSPrinter 8.3 folder. The guide provides detailed information about
installing and using the Adobe PSPrinter Driver.
The guide is less than 50 pages and can be printed using the
Download PostScript File command in either the File menu of the
Adobe Downloader utility or the General menu of XANTÉ
Command Center. See the appropriate sections later in this chapter
for information about installing and using these programs.
Mac Watermark Plug-in Folder

A Mac Watermark Plug-in folder is provided in each language
directory in the PSPrinter 8.3 folder. This folder contains the Adobe
PSPrinter 8.3 Watermark plug-in for the Macintosh and a User
Guide. These files allow you to customize your output with
underlying watermarks.
This plug-in requires the following system setup:

• PSPrinter 8.3.1 (the plug-in does not work with AdobePS 8.5.1)
• Macintosh running System 7.1 or later
• 100 K of available disk space for the plug-in, preferences, and
Watermarks folder
The User Guide for the Watermark Plug-in 1.0 is included as a

SimpleText document in the folder. It describes all system
requirements and the installation procedure. To print the User Guide,
which is less than 10 pages, double-click WM UserGuide to open the
file; then print from the SimpleText File menu.
_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-13

AdobePS 8.5.1
If you use the individual printer installation option of the XInstaller,
the AdobePS 8.5.1 is launched automatically following the
installation of XANTÉ Utilities and your printer’s PPD. The
AdobePS installation program also can be launched from the Printer
Drivers folder.
The AdobePS installation program loads AdobePS, an AdobePS

Readme file, an AdobePS driver extension called Custom Page into
the Printer Descriptions folder, and other files required for the Adobe
PostScript printer driver. It does not load PPD files automatically.
The installation overwrites any earlier version of AdobePS but will
not overwrite other printer drivers. Check the Readme First file in
the appropriate language folder of the AdobePS 8.5.1 folder before
beginning the driver installation.
Installing AdobePS 8.5.1

The installer loads the AdobePS driver on your Macintosh.



AdobePS 8.5.1 icon.
5. Double-click the appropriate language folder; then

double-click the Installer icon.
6. Follow steps 6 through 9 in “XInstaller” earlier in this chapter.
7. Install your printer’s PPD (see the next section) when your
Macintosh restarts.

Installing the PPD for AdobePS 8.5.1
The XANTÉ PPDs are in the AdobePS 8.5.1 folder. If you did not
use the XInstaller to load the driver and PPD for your printer, follow
the procedure in this section to copy the PPD from the CD-ROM to
your system.



AdobePS 8.5.1 icon.
5. Open the Printer Descriptions folder, if necessary, and select

the PPD for your printer.
6. Drag the PPD to the System: Extensions: Printer Descriptions

folder on your Macintosh.
The AdobePS printer driver and your printer’s PPD are installed. Use
the procedure in the next section, “Configuring the PPD,” to
complete the driver setup.
_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-15

Configuring the PPD
After the PSPrinter or AdobePS driver and your printer’s PPD are
installed, select and configure your printer’s PPD.
1. Select Chooser from the Apple menu. The Chooser window

appears (fig. 3.5).
2. Select the AdobePS or the PSPrinter icon from the box on the
left (top left in a network environment); a list of available
printers appears in the box on the right. Highlight your printer
and double-click. If the setup reminder dialog box appears,
click OK to continue.
Note: You may have to scroll to find the driver icon and
your printer listing. If the printer does not appear in
the list, check all cable connections.
Fig. 3.5 The Chooser Window in a Network Environment

3. Click Setup in the Chooser window (fig. 3.5), if necessary, to
bring up the PPD setup dialog box (fig. 3.6).
Fig. 3.6 PPD Setup Dialog Box
4. Click Auto Setup (fig. 3.6). The Adobe PostScript printer

driver automatically selects and configures the correct PPD for
your printer. If you have multiple PPDs for your type of
printer, select the correct PPD when prompted.
5. Click OK when the Auto Setup process is complete to accept

the selections. You return to the Chooser window where an
icon appears next to the printer you set up.
Note: If using PSPrinter, turn background printing off in the

Chooser window (fig. 3.5) to maximize processing
performance. This option does not appear if the
AdobePS driver is selected.
6. Close the Chooser window.
Note: If the following window appears during the Auto Setup or if

you want to check or change your PPD configuration, see
“Manual PPD Setup” in the next section.
Fig. 3.7 Autosetup Failed Message
_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-17

Manual PPD Setup
Use the following procedure to check or change your printer’s PPD
configuration or if the Auto Setup procedure failed.
1. Follow the first three steps in “Configuring the PPD” in the

previous section.
2. Click Select PPD (fig. 3.6). A screen appears from which you
can select a PPD file.
3. Highlight your printer’s PPD and click Select. You return to

the PPD setup dialog box (fig. 3.6).
4. Click Configure to open the Installable Options screen (fig. 3.8).
Fig. 3.8 Installable Options Screen
5. Configure the options that are installed or implemented on

your printer. You may need to use a scroll bar to access all of
the options.
a. Select Installed in the menus for the upgrades that are

installed on your printer, such as optional trays, the extra
wide print upgrade, and the optional duplexer
(Accel-a-Writer 8300 only).
b. Select True in the Spooler Enabled menu to enable the

Save Spooled Job menu in your application Print dialog
box.

Note: This does not enable the Spooler feature on your
printer. The Spooler must be enabled on the
printer, using either the front panel Interfaces
menus (see chapter 5) or XANTÉ Command
Center (see “The Spooler” later in this chapter) for
the Save Spooled Job feature to function properly.
c. Select the amount of RAM that is installed on your

printer.
6. Click OK to confirm your configuration and close the

Installable Options screen.
7. Click OK to close the PPD setup dialog box; then, close the
Chooser window.
Note: When you add a printer from the network, go through either
the Auto Setup or manual setup procedure to ensure that the
printer is recognized by the network.
Configuring the Printer

If necessary, configure the printer’s communication interface using
the front panel. See Chapter 5, “Configuration,” for details.
1. Select the SETUP:INTERFACES menu.
2. Select the menu for the printer interface that is connected to

your computer (LOCALTALK or ETHERTALK).
3. Select the ENABLE menu.
4. Select the YES option.
5. Press the Reset key until READY/IDLE appears in the display.
_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-19

6. Verify the setup.
a. Make sure your Macintosh is connected to the printer

with a LocalTalk or Ethernet cable.
b. Locate and open the XANTÉ Utilities folder; then,

double-click the XANTÉ Command Center icon.
c. Select Printer Status from the General menu to display a

dialog box showing the current printer status.
Note: If the status dialog box does not appear check all
cable connections and be sure the printer
interface you are using is enabled on the printer.
d. Click OK in the dialog box; then select Quit from the

File menu to close XANTÉ Command Center.
Downloads Folder
The Downloads folder contains Adobe PostScript files and
Overview.PDF, which describes these files. Download the PostScript
files to your printer using the Adobe Downloader or the Download
PostScript File option in XANTÉ Command Center (see “Adobe
Downloader” and “XANTÉ Command Center” later in this chapter).
The Clean.ps file prints cleaning instructions for the Accel-a-Writer

8100, 8200, and PlateMaker II.
The CT4_cal.ps file prints instructions for performing color

calibration of the CT4 from a Macintosh and a PC.
The Ftp.ps file prints instructions for uploading and downloading

files to XANTÉ’s FTP (File Transfer Protocol) site.
The InitdskX.ps files are used to initialize hard disks attached to or

installed in your printer.
number (Initdsk1.ps initializes SCSI disk #1, Initdsk2.ps
• The Initdska.ps and Initdskb.ps files initialize the internal IDE
drive of the same designation (the A or B disk) on the printer.
to the printer.
Initializing a disk erases all information stored on the disk. See

“Initializing a Hard Disk” in chapter 2.
The Novell34.ps file prints instructions for setting up a XANTÉ

printer on a Novell network.
The Parmdump.ps file prints a list of the settings for the

communication devices currently configured for your printer. If you
call XANTÉ Technical Support, you may be asked to print this page
to check your setup.
The Setzone.ps file allows you to set the EtherTalk zone name for
the printer. Open the file in a text editor, such as SimpleText, and
change “name of zone” in the parentheses to the name of your
EtherTalk zone. Save the file, and download it to your printer. The
printer must be restarted before the change is effective.
The Set_IP.ps file allows you to set the IP address for your printer.
Open the file in a text editor, such as SimpleText, and change the IP
address in the parentheses to the IP address of your printer. Save the
file, and download it to your printer. The printer must be restarted
before the change is effective.
The Startpg.off file disables the printer’s start-up page feature,

which prevents it from printing automatically each time the printer is
restarted (see “Startup Page Menu” in chapter 5).
The Startpg.on file enables the startup page feature, which causes it
to print automatically each time the printer is restarted (see “Startup
Page Menu” in chapter 5).
The Sysparm.ps file prints a list of the current system parameters. If

you call XANTÉ Technical Support, you may be asked to print this
page to check your setup.
_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-21

App Drivers Folder
Some Aldus PageMaker and FreeHand versions and QuarkXPress
require special files in addition to the standard PPD supplied for
your printer. These files are supplied by XANTÉ in the App Drivers
folder on the CD-ROM. See appendix B, “Application Notes and
Page Design” for additional information.
Note: Some of the advanced features on XANTÉ printers may not

be available when using older application versions.
Aldus APD Folder

This folder contains the Kanji version of APD (Aldus Printer
Description) files for Aldus PageMaker versions 4.01 and earlier and
Aldus FreeHand versions 2.02 and earlier. Call Technical Support to
request a copy of the APDs for a Roman printer.
1. Load and configure the Adobe PostScript printer driver and

your printer’s PPD following the instructions in “Adobe
PostScript Printer Drivers” earlier in this chapter.
2. Copy your printer’s APD from the Aldus APD folder on the
XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM to the APD folder in the Aldus
Folder in your Macintosh System Folder.
Note: The name of the APD indicates the XANTÉ printer it

supports.
3. Check your application documentation for instructions on

selecting and using the APD.

Aldus PPD Folder
The Standard and Kanji folders in the Aldus PPD folder contain
PPDs for Aldus PageMaker versions 4.2 to 5.0 and Aldus FreeHand
version 3.0 and 3.1. To install these PPDs

2. Copy your printer’s PPD from the Standard or Kanji folder in the
Aldus PPD folder on the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM to the Aldus
PPD folder in the System Folder on your Macintosh.
Note: The name of the PPD indicates the XANTÉ printer it

supports. In the Standard folder, a “W” after the name
indicates the PPD is for use on printers with the wide
format option.
3. Check you application documentation for instructions on

selecting and using the PPD.
QuarkXPress PDF Folder

The Standard and Kanji folders in the QuarkXPress folder contain PDFs
(Printer Description Files) for each XANTÉ printer. These files are
required by QuarkXPress in addition to the PPD. Use these PDFs,
created by XANTÉ, to ensure the highest quality output from your
printer and QuarkXPress.
The XInstaller loads the QuarkXPress PDF if you choose an individual

printer installation. To load these PDFs manually

2. Copy your printer’s PDF from the Standard or Kanji folder in

the QuarkXPress PDF folder on the XANTÉ Utilities
CD-ROM to the appropriate folder on your Macintosh.
_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-23

• For versions 3.2 and earlier, copy the PDF to the same
folder as the QuarkXPress application.
• For versions 3.3 and later, copy the PDF to the

QuarkXPress PDF folder.
3. Remove “Balloon Help” from the Quark folder for

QuarkXPress 3.3.2.
Note: The name of the PDF indicates the XANTÉ Printer it

supports. In the Standard folder, a “W” after the name
indicates the PDF is for use on printers with the wide
format option.
XANTÉ Command Center

XANTÉ Command Center is a utility that allows you to check and
control many of your printer’s functions from your Macintosh. The
File and Edit menus are similar to other Macintosh applications and
are not described in detail in this section.
The General Menu

The General menu allows you to communicate with the printer to
perform margin and line length calibrations, get information about
printer settings and status, control your printer’s spooling feature,
download PostScript files to the printer, and change some printer
default settings (fig. 3.9).

Fig. 3.9 General Menu Options
Printer Status
This option provides on screen information about the printer’s current
status. For example, the status may indicate that the printer is idle, ready
to receive a job. If the printer is receiving data, the status message lists
the interface source; if the printer is processing a job, the status message
lists the user name, document name, and interface source.
Printer Information
This option allows you to send information about the printer’s
current settings to the screen or the printer. The list includes
information about the printer configuration, the storage devices on
the printer, and the network configuration.
Spooling
This option allows you to enable and control spooling on the
printer’s hard drive. Spooling frees up the communication channel
between your Macintosh and printer which permits your computer to
return to other processing quickly. Spooling can be enabled for each
interface independently using this menu or the Interface menus on
the printer’s front panel. See “The Spooler” later in this chapter.
Margin Adjustment
This option allows you to adjust the printer margin. Printer margin
refers to the imageable area, not to margin settings for a document in
an application. The imageable area is the portion of a page on which
the printer can lay down toner. The Margin Adjustment allows you
to adjust the position of this imageable area. See “Printer Margin
Adjustment” later in this chapter.
_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-25

X•ACT Calibration
This option allows you to calibrate the horizontal and vertical
dimensions of your printer’s output to a standard. See “Accurate
Calibration Technology” later in this chapter for details about using
XANTÉ’s patent pending X•ACT feature.
Download PostScript File

This option allows you to download PostScript files to your printer.
Test Directory
This option allows you to store files on the Accel-a-Graphix CT4’s
hard disk for access from the front panel. This function is not valid
for laser printers.
Reboot Printer
This option allows you to reboot the printer from your computer. This
option causes the printer to go through the initialization process.
Startup Page
This option allows you to enable or disable the page that prints
automatically after your printer goes through the initialization
process. The Print One option allows you to print a start-up page
regardless of whether the feature is enabled. The factory default is to
print the start-up page after initialization.
This feature can also be controlled from the Startup Page menu on
the printer’s front panel or by downloading the STARTPG.ON and
STARTPG.OFF files. See “Downloads Folder” earlier in this chapter
and chapter 5, “Configuration,” for details.

The Networking Menu
This menu allows you to configure your printer’s optional Ethernet
interface for Novell Print Server emulation, AppleTalk, and the
TCP/IP communication (fig. 3.10). These options should only be
used by your Network Administrator. See the Ethernet Upgrade
manual that is shipped with the upgrade package.
Fig 3.10 Networking Menu Options
Novell Print Server

The following options in this menu allow you to configure the Novell
Print Server emulation on your printer’s optional Ethernet interface.
• Login & Printing—allows you to enable your printer to login to
and accept print jobs from a designated Novell file server.
• File Server—allows you to specify up to four Novell file servers
for your printer to poll for print jobs.
• Print Server Name—allows you to specify the name your printer
will use to login to the Novell file server(s).
• Set Print Server Password—allows you to specify the password
required for your printer to login to the Novell file server(s).
• Network Protocol—allows you to configure the Novell Print Server
emulation for the protocol used on your network. The Novell Print
Server menu on the printer’s front panel is another method to set the
network protocol. See chapter 5, “Configuration.”
_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-27

AppleTalk
The following options in this menu allow you to configure the
AppleTalk protocol on your printer’s optional Ethernet interface.
• Printer Name—allows you to set the name your printer
advertises on the network.
• EtherTalk Zone Name—allows you to change the default zone
assigned to your printer by the network router. This option
should only be used by (or at the direction of) your Network
Administrator. See the Ethernet Upgrade manual that is shipped
with the upgrade package for instructions.
TCP/IP
The following options in this menu allow you to enable the TCP/IP
protocol and set the TCP/IP address on your printer’s optional
Ethernet interface.
• Address—allows you to change your printer’s default TCP/IP
address to one that agrees with the TCP/IP addressing system on
your network.
• LPR Enable—allows you to enable or disable the Line Printer
protocol on your printer’s optional Ethernet interface. The Line
Printer menu on the printer’s front panel is another method to
enable or disable LPR. See chapter 5, “Configuration.”
The Color Menu

The Color menu allows you to create custom gamma curves to
calibrate your printer’s grayscale output for specific ink, media, and
environmental conditions (fig. 3.11). Two of the three Color menu
options, Transfer Curve and CRD Directories, are for use only with
XANTÉ’s wide-format hardware RIP, the Accel-a-Graphix CT4.
Fig. 3.11 Color Menu Options

Transfer Curve
This menu allows you to create and control calibration curves for up
to four printers controller by the Accel-a-Graphix CT4. This function
is not valid for laser printers.
CRD Directories
This menu allows you to manage the CRD library on the
Accel-a-Graphix CT4’s hard drive. This function is not valid for
laser printers.
Linearize
This menu allows you to create and download custom curves to your
printer. These curves can be selected for a specific job from the Print
dialog box or set as the default from the printer’s front panel. See
“Calibration with a Densitometer” later in this chapter.
XANTÉ Linearizer
XANTÉ Linearizer allows you to create a file that adjusts your
printer’s grayscale output to a linear standard using densitometer
measurements. This file is downloaded to the printer as a custom
gamma curve using XANTÉ Command Center. See “Calibration
with a Densitometer” later in this chapter for detailed instructions.
Fig. 3.12 XANTÉ Linearizer Menu
_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-29

Adobe Downloader
Use Adobe Downloader to load and manage font files on your
printer’s hard drive and to send PostScript files to your printer.
Fig. 3.13 Adobe Downloader Menu
The File Menu

The file menu allows you to download fonts and PostScript files to
the printer and to quit Adobe Downloader.
Download Fonts
This menu allows you to download fonts to an optional hard disk on
your printer or to printer memory. Fonts downloaded to your printer
are considered resident, which means applications do not have to
bundle these fonts with print jobs. Fonts downloaded to printer
memory only remain during the current power cycle. Fonts
downloaded to an optional hard disk survive a power cycle. See
“Downloaded Fonts” later in this chapter for detailed instructions.
Download PostScript File

This option allows you to select a PostScript file on your Macintosh
and send it to the printer. XANTÉ Command Center also provides
this option under the General menu.

The Special Menu
The Special menu allows you to check printer status and manage fonts
downloaded to your printer.
Printer Status
This option allows you to check the current status of the printer. This
option is also available using the Printer Status option of the General
menu in XANTÉ Command Center.
Printer Font Directory

The Printer Font Directory option provides access to the fonts
downloaded to the printer. Using this menu, you can print a list or
view on screen all fonts downloaded to printer ROM, memory, or an
optional hard disk. The Delete option of this menu allows you to
remove fonts that have been downloaded to memory or the optional
hard disk. You cannot remove fonts from ROM. See “Downloaded
Fonts” later in this chapter for detailed instructions.
Other Special Menu Options

We recommend that you use the Reboot Printer option of the General
menu in XANTÉ Command Center instead of the Clear Font Cache
or Restart Printer options in the Special menu. See the PostScript
Reference Language Manual for information about using the Use
Different Password option.
Procedures
This section provides detailed instructions for performing common
procedures using the programs provided in the XANTÉ Utilities.
_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-31

The Spooler
Spooling can be enabled for each interface independently through
XANTÉ Command Center or the Interface menus on the printer’s
front panel. XANTÉ Command Center also allows you to manage
the jobs in the spooler print queue. See chapter 8, “Advanced
Features,” for additional information.
Using the Front Panel

The Spooler can be enabled using the Spooler menu of the interface
that you will be using (see chapter 5, “Configuration,” for additional
information).
1. Select the Interface (SETUP:INTERFACES) menu.
2. Select the printer interface (SERIAL, PARALLEL,

ETHERTALK, LPR, or NOVELL PSERVER) that you use to
send files.
3. Select the Spool menu.
5. Press the On Line key to return the printer to the

READY/IDLE state.
Using XANTÉ Command Center

printer’s hard drive.
To Enable the Spooler
1. Open XANTÉ Command Center and select Spooling from the

General menu to open the Spooling window (fig. 3.14).

Fig 3.14 The Spooling Window
2. Select Devices from the Configure box to open the Select

Spool Device window (fig. 3.15).
Fig. 3.15 The Select Spool Device Window
3. Select the disk to use to store the spooled jobs or select NONE
to disable spooling; then click Ok. The spool device is set up;
then the Spooling Window reappears (fig. 3.14).
_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-33

4. Select Interfaces from the Configure box to open the Select I/O
Interfaces to Spool window (fig. 3.16).
Fig. 3.16 The Select I/O Interfaces to Spool Window
5. Select the interface that you use to send files to the printer;
then click Ok. The I/O interface is set up; then the Spooling
window reappears (fig. 3.14).
6. Click Ok to close the Spooling Window; then select Quit from

the File menu to exit XANTÉ Command Center.
To manage jobs in the spooler’s job queue

The spooler’s job queue can store up to 250 jobs. Jobs sent with the
Save Spooled Job option set to True in the Print dialog box are
retained indefinitely in the queue (see chapter 6, “PPD Settings”). A
saved job can be reprinted quickly from the Spooling menu without
reprocessing the file through an application.
1. Open XANTÉ Command Center and select Spooling from the

General menu to open the Spooling window (fig. 3.17).

Fig 3.17 The Job Queue in the Spooling Window
The Job queue lists the job ID, job status, job title, spool
device, and file size of all jobs in the spooling queue. Job
status can be W (waiting to be processed), P (currently
processing), or H (already processed and held using the Save
Spooled Job feature).
2. Use the Control buttons to manage the jobs in the queue.

Print Prints the highlighted job (used to print saved
jobs)
Delete Deletes the highlighted job
Delete All Deletes all jobs in the queue
Move to Front Moves the highlighted job to the front of the
queue
Refresh Updates the screen with the current job queue
3. Click Ok to close the Spooling window; then select Quit from

the File menu to exit XANTÉ Command Center.
_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-35

Calibration with a Densitometer
You can create up to seven custom gamma curves and download these
to your printer, in addition to the seven standard curves supplied with
XANTÉ’s Halftone Calibration Technology. The Linear option on the
printer’s front panel Gamma menu allows you to select Custom Gamma
0 as your printer’s default. The Gamma PPD option in the Print dialog
box allows you to select any of the custom gamma curves or any of the
standard gamma curves on a job by job basis (see “The Gamma Menu”
in chapter 5, “Gamma” in chapter 6, and “Halftone Calibration
Technology” in chapter 8 for details).
Custom curves can be used to adjust your printer’s performance to

eliminate inconsistencies due to equipment age, different inks and
media, and environmental conditions. These curves are created using
XANTÉ Command Center, the XANTÉ Linearization Tool, and a
densitometer using the following steps:
• Printing a Calibration Strip
• Using the Densitometer
• Linearizing the Densitometer Data
• Creating a Custom Gamma Curve
Printing a Calibration Strip

The first step in calibrating your printer is to print a calibration strip
to measure the printer’s current performance as a basis for the
calibration.
1. Open XANTÉ Command Center and select Linearize from the

Color menu to open the Linearization window (fig. 3.18).

Fig. 3.18 The Linearization Window
2. Set the Number of Patches to print. The default setting of 11

prints a calibration strip with levels of gray at 10% increments.
3. Click Print Calibration Strip (fig. 3.18). The calibration strip

shows the printer’s performance using no gamma curve
correction.
4. Click Ok to close the Linearization window; then select Quit

from the File menu to close XANTÉ Command Center.
Using the Densitometer

A densitometer uses a standard light source to measure the amount of
light reflected from printer output. This measurement is compared to
a standard and expressed as a percentage of gray.
The densitometer, like any other precision instrument, must be

calibrated before each use. After calibrating the densitometer, use it
to get density measurements for the calibration strip you printed.
Refer to the documentation of the model you are using for
instructions on calibrating and using the densitometer.
Note: Make sure that the densitometer reads measurements for dot
area, not dot density. For instructions on changing this
setting, refer to the densitometer’s documentation.
_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-37

Linearizing the Densitometer Data
The XANTÉ Linearizer uses the densitometer measurements to
calculate the adjustments necessary to correct printer performance to
a linear standard.
1. Open XANTÉ Linearizer and choose Select Device from the

Device menu. The following window appears.
Fig. 3.19 The Select Device Window
2. Select Generic B&W from the Select Device drop-down menu

(fig. 3.19), and click Ok. You return to the Linearizer main menu.
3. Select Linearize from the Device Menu. The main window for
Generic B&W appears (fig. 3.20).
Fig. 3.20 The Device Main Window
4. Enter the measurements from the densitometer next to the

corresponding percentages in the Enter Coverage Values section.
5. Click Graph to display a curve of your printer’s performance

and the standard linear curve.

6. Click Save As. Specify a file name, select a folder on your
system, and click Save to save the file.
7. Click Ok to close the Device window; then select Quit from

the File menu to exit the XANTÉ Linearizer.
Creating a Custom Gamma Curve

Use XANTÉ Command Center to create and automatically download
a custom gamma curve by merging the Linearization file you created
with a custom gamma curve on your printer. The new custom curve
adjusts your printer’s performance to a linear standard for the
specific conditions (ink, media, and environment) at the time you
printed the calibration strip.

Color menu to open the Linearization window (fig. 3.21).
2. Select Load (fig. 3.21) to open a file list window.
3. Locate and highlight the file you created in the Linearizer; click
Open to select the file and return to the Linearization window.
4. Select the custom gamma curve to update on the printer from

the Update Transfer Curve list (fig. 3.21).
_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-39

5. Click Linearize to create a new curve and download it to your
printer. The new curve replaces the existing curve of the same
name on the printer.
6. Print another calibration strip and measure it with the

Densitometer to verify the accuracy of the curve you created.
If the measured densities differ from the standards by more
than 3%, repeat the calibration process.
7. Click Ok to close the Linearization window; then select Quit

from the File menu to exit XANTÉ Command Center.
Note: To reset a custom gamma curve to the factory default (a

copy of the standard Gamma 0 curve), highlight the curve in
the Update Transfer Curve list and click Reset.
Accurate Calibration Technology

This option allows you to calibrate printed line lengths using XANTÉ’s
patent pending X•ACT feature. Your printer is calibrated before it is
shipped, but it may drift out of alignment over time. After using X•ACT
to calibrate the line lengths, always adjust the alignment of the
imageable area using the Margin Alignment option in XANTÉ
Command Center.
1. Open XANTÉ Command Center and select X•ACT

Calibration from the General menu to open the X•ACT
Calibration window (fig. 3.22).

Fig. 3.22 X•ACT Screen
2. Select the media size you are using in the Paper Size box.
3. Click Update/Print. A test page prints with a horizontal and a

vertical line on it.
4. Turn the test page so that the large and small crosses are
aligned with one another as they are on the X•ACT
Calibration screen (fig. 3.22).
5. Measure the horizontal line. Adjust the horizontal slide bar on

the X•ACT screen (fig. 3.22) until the number beneath the
horizontal slide bar equals the measured length of the line.
6. Measure the vertical line. Adjust the vertical slide bar on the
X•ACT screen (fig. 3.22) until the number above the vertical
slide bar equals the measured length of the line.
7. Click Update/Print. When the new page prints, measure the

lines. They should be the correct lengths. If not, repeat steps 5,
6, and 7 until the measurements are correct.
8. Click Close to return to the Command Center main menu; then

adjust the printer margins using the following procedure.
_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-41

Printer Margin Adjustment
The Margin Adjustment option allows you to adjust the position of
the imageable area. Your printer is calibrated before it is shipped, but
it may drift out of alignment over time. Always adjust the position of
the imageable area on the page after using X•ACT Calibration.
Note: Use the standard paper size (letter or A4) for your paper
cassette with the Margin Adjustment function.
1. Open XANTÉ Command Center, if necessary, and select

Margin Adjustment from the General menu. The Printer
Margin Control screen appears.
Fig. 3.23 Printer Margin Control Screen
2. Select Standard to use 1/32 inch units or Metric for 1 mm

units for adjustments.
3. Select Set & Print, then click Send to Printer. Click Ok in the
warning dialog box (fig. 3.24). An alignment test page prints.

Fig. 3.24 Margin Alignment Warning
4. Turn the test page so that -x is to the left and -y is at the top
of the crossed lines.
5. Check the current settings that printed near the crossed lines.
The factory default is x = 0, y = 0, which should cause each
line to print 1" (25.4 mm) from the edge of the page.
The coordinates listed on the alignment test page are an

indication of the change from the factory default in dots per
inch. Because these measurements are rounded for display,
adjustments should be based on careful measurements, not the
printed coordinates.
Note: If the current settings are not the factory defaults and
you must make adjustments to the coordinates, it may
be easier to reset the coordinates to the factory default
before beginning. To do this, select Factory Default;
click Send to Printer; then, click Ok in the warning
dialog box. Print another alignment test page (steps 2
and 3) using the factory defaults.
6. Measure the distance from the edge of the page to the -x line.
This distance is dependent on the y coordinate.
• To move the -x line away from the edge of the page, move
the slide on the vertical slide bar up (toward the -y).
• To move the -x line closer to the edge of the page, move
the slide on the vertical slide bar down (toward the +y).
• The distance moved (in the units you selected in step 2) is
displayed to the right of ∆y.
_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-43
7. Measure the distance from the edge of the page to the -y line.
This distance is dependent on the x coordinate.
• To move the -y line away from the edge of the page, move
the slide on the horizontal slide bar to the left (toward the
-x).
• To move the -y line closer to the edge of the page, move
the slide on the horizontal slide bar to the right (toward the
+x).
• The distance moved (in the units you selected in step 2) is
displayed to the right of ∆x.
8. Print another alignment page (see step 3).
9. Measure the -x and -y lines on the new test page. If the lines
are not each 1" (25.4 mm) from the edge of the paper, go back
to step 5 and repeat the process.
10. When the -x and -y lines are correctly set, click Close. Then,
select Quit from the File menu to exit Command Center.
Downloaded Fonts
Fonts downloaded to your printer are considered resident, which
means applications do not have to bundle these fonts with print jobs.
You can download fonts to your printer’s hard disk or memory.
Fonts downloaded to printer memory only remain during the current
power cycle. Fonts downloaded to an optional hard disk survive a
power cycle.
Caution: Fonts downloaded to memory may cause PostScript

errors to occur due to insufficient memory. To resolve
this, download the fonts to the printer’s optional hard
disk or increase the memory in the printer.
Downloading Fonts
1. Open the Adobe Downloader and select Download Fonts from
the File menu to bring up the following screen.

Outline Fonts Available: Outline Fonts Selected:
Fonts Device Memory
Ameri Macinto... Ameri
AmeriBol Eject AmeriBol
AmeriExtBol
Desktop
AmeriIta
AvantGarBoo Add
AvantGarBooObl
Add All
AvantGarDem
AvantGarDemObl Remove
BenguBol
BenguBoo Cancel
Bodon
Download
BodonBol
BodonBolIta
BodonPos
BookmDem
Fig. 3.25 Download Font Screen
2. Select the folder on your Macintosh that contains the font files
from the drop down menu on the top left of the screen. The
large box on the left of the screen displays the fonts in the
selected folder.
3. Select Memory or Disk from the Device menu as the

destination for the downloaded fonts.
Note: If more than one optional hard disk is attached to your

printer, select the target disk from the drop-down menu.
4. Highlight a single font in the list on the left and click Add or click
Add All to select all of the fonts in the open folder. The selected
font(s) will appear in the list on the right of the screen (fig. 3.25).
Note: To remove fonts from the selected list (on the right of the
screen), highlight the fonts and click Remove.
5. Click Download to send the selected fonts to the printer.
6. After the download is complete, select Quit from the File menu
to close the Adobe Downloader.
_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-45

Reviewing and Removing Downloaded Fonts
1. Open the Adobe Downloader and select Printer Font Directory
from the Special menu. The following screen appears.
Where would you like the directory sent?
Screen
Printer
OK Cancel
Fig. 3.26 Listing Downloaded Fonts
2. Choose Printer to print a list of all fonts in printer memory,

ROM, cartridge ROM, and on hard disks (fig. 3.26), or choose
Screen to bring up the Font Directory screen (fig. 3.27).
Fig 3.27 The Font Directory Screen
3. Select the font storage area from the Device menu to view the
fonts present in that area.
4. To remove a font from printer memory or a hard disk,

highlight the font and click Delete.

5. Click OK to close the Font Directory Screen and return to the
Adobe Downloader main menu.
Note: To remove fonts downloaded to printer memory, turn the

printer off. Fonts are stored in printer memory only during
the current power cycle.
◊◊◊
_____________________________________ Macintosh Setup 3-47

Chapter 4 - PC Setup
Chapter Overview
Introduction ..................................................................................... 4-3
Before You Begin ............................................................................ 4-3
XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM (PC) .................................................... 4-3
XANTÉ Utilities Installer ............................................................... 4-6
XANTÉ Utilities and Application Drivers ............................... 4-6
Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0 .............................................................. 4-7
Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers .................................................... 4-8
Windows 3.1 and 3.11 Printer Drivers ..................................... 4-8
Windows 95 Drivers ............................................................... 4-16
Windows NT Drivers .............................................................. 4-23
Configuring the Printer ........................................................... 4-28
PDFs Folder .................................................................................. 4-28
PS_Files Folder ............................................................................. 4-29
XANTÉ Command Center ............................................................ 4-31
Configuration for XANTÉ Command Center ........................ 4-31
The Options Menu .................................................................. 4-32
The Controller Menu .............................................................. 4-32
The Ports Menu ...................................................................... 4-38
The XANTÉ Linearization Tool ................................................... 4-38
Procedures ..................................................................................... 4-39
The Spooler ............................................................................ 4-39
Calibration with a Densitometer ............................................. 4-43
Accurate Calibration Technology ........................................... 4-47
Printer Margin Adjustment ..................................................... 4-49
Managing Fonts on an Optional Hard Disk ............................ 4-51
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-1

Notes
4-2 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

Introduction
This chapter describes the contents and use of the XANTÉ Utilities
CD-ROM for the PC. This includes instructions for installing and
configuring the Adobe PostScript printer driver, your printer’s PPD
(PostScript Printer Description) file, XANTÉ Command Center, the
XANTÉ Linearization Tool, and other utility files. The procedures
section contains instructions for using some of your printer’s
innovative features.
Before You Begin

You should be familiar with standard PC and Windows procedures
such as choosing commands, selecting options, using buttons and
boxes, locating files, and scrolling. If you have questions on any of
these procedures, see your DOS, Windows, and mouse
documentation.
XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM (PC)

The XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM, shipped with your printer, includes
Adobe PostScript printer drivers, PPDs, XANTÉ Utilities, PostScript
files, and other programs to help you setup, customize, and troubleshoot
your printer. This section briefly describes the main folders in the PC
section of the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM.
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-3

The Acrobat folder contains Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0 installation
programs for Windows 3.1 and Windows 95. See “Adobe Acrobat
Reader 3.0” later in this chapter and the Read1st.txt file on the CD-
ROM for installation instructions.
The AG_CT4 folder contains CRDs and default curves for use with
XANTÉ’s Accel-a-Graphix CT4.
The ATM folder contains an installation program for Adobe Type

Manager and the expanded font set for use with Adobe PostScript 3. For
Windows 3.1, run the Install.exe in the ATM302 folder. For Windows
95, run the Install.exe in either the ATM302 or ATM40 folder. For
Windows NT 4.0, run the Setup.exe in the ATM40_NT folder.
The Drivers folder contains Adobe PostScript drivers and installation

programs for Roman and Kanji font printers.
The XANTÉ Utilities Installer launches the installation program for the
most recent version of the Adobe PostScript Printer Driver for your
operating system. If you cannot use the XANTÉ Utilities Installer or if
you prefer to use the earlier Adobe PostScript Printer Driver, these files
can be loaded individually. See the Readme.PDF file on the CD-ROM,
“XANTÉ Utilities Installer,” and “Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers”
later in this chapter.
The Manuals folder contains PDF files of the current versions of the
manuals for XANTÉ printers. These manuals can be viewed on screen
or printed using Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0.
The PDFs folder contains printer drivers required by QuarkXPress. See

“XANTÉ Utilities Installer” and “PDFs Folder” later in this chapter.
The PPDs folder contains XANTÉ PPDs for Roman and Kanji font
printers. See the Readme.PDF file on the CD-ROM and “Adobe
PostScript Printer Drivers” later in this chapter.
The Ps_files folder contains PostScript files that can be downloaded to

your printer using XANTÉ Command Center. See the Overview.PDF
file in the Ps_files folder on the CD-ROM and “Ps_files Folder” later in
this chapter.
4-4 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

The Xinstall folder contains the XANTÉ Utilities Installer for the PC.
This program installs XANTÉ Command Center, the XANTÉ
Linearization Tool, the PDF (Printer Description File) for QuarkXPress
(if selected), and the PPD for PageMaker (if selected); then, it launches
the appropriate Adobe PostScript Printer Driver installation program for
your operating system. See “XANTÉ Utilities Installer” later in this
chapter.
The Xutils folder contains XANTÉ Command Center, the XANTÉ

Linearization Tool, and a Read1st.PDF file that describes the manual
installation and setup of the Utilities. See “XANTÉ Utilities Installer”
and the individual utility sections later in this chapter for additional
information.
The Instread.txt describes the XANTÉ Utilities Installer and provides

information about its use and about Adobe Acrobat 3.0 and the Adobe
Type Manager. This file is displayed by the XANTÉ Utilities Installer.
The Read1st.txt describes the XANTÉ Utilities Installer and how to use
it and the Adobe Acrobat 3.0 Installer.
The Readme.PDF file provides an overview of the XANTÉ Utilities

for the PC and describes how to install Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers
if you do not use the XANTÉ Utilities Installer. This file can be opened
using Acrobat Reader 3.0.
The Xantent file is used by the Adobe PostScript printer driver

installation for Windows NT 3.5x.
Always check the Readme files on the CD-ROM for information that
was not available at the time this manual was printed.
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-5

XANTÉ Utilities Installer
The XANTÉ Utilities Installer installs XANTÉ Command Center, the
XANTÉ Linearization Tool, and your printer’s QuarkXPress PDF; then,
it launches the Adobe PostScript Printer Driver installer. On systems
running Windows 3.1/3.11, the installer for the most recent printer
driver is launched. On systems running Windows 95, you can select
which printer driver to install. See “Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers”
later in this chapter for additional information.
The XANTÉ Utilities Installer runs properly only on an Intel based

computer running Windows 3.1/3.11, Windows 95, or Windows NT. If
this installation program does not execute properly or if you prefer to
load the files manually, see the Readme.PDF on the CD-ROM and
“Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers” later in this chapter to load those
drivers manually and “PDFs Folder” later in this chapter to load
QuarkXPress PDFs manually. To install XANTÉ Command Center and
the XANTÉ Linearization Tool without using the XANTÉ Utilities
Installer, run the Setup.exe file in the Xutils folder on the CD-ROM.
XANTÉ Utilities and Application Drivers

1. Insert the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM into your PC. The
XANTÉ Utilities Installer is launched automatically on
systems running Windows 95 and Windows NT 4.0. To start
the Installer manually
a. Select Run from the File menu (Windows 3.1) or from

the Start menu (Windows 95).
b. Use the Browse function to select the Setup.exe file

(Windows 3.1) or the Xinstall.exe file (Windows 95,
Windows NT 3.5x and 4.0) on the CD-ROM; then click
OK.
2. Follow the instructions on each screen before clicking Next to

continue the configuration. To exit the installation program
without installing any files, click Cancel; then, click Exit Setup.
4-6 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

Note: You can select only one Application PDF or PPD and
only one printer per installation process.
3. Review the configuration information on the Start Copying

Files screen before clicking Next to install the XANTÉ
Utilities, the QuarkXPress PDF (if selected), and the PPD for
PageMaker (if selected). The QuarkXPress PDF and the PPD
for PageMaker are copied into the default directories for the
application version or into the directory you specified in the
setup.
4. After these files are installed, the Adobe PostScript Installer is

launched. Go to the appropriate section for your operating
system in “Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers” to continue the
installation.
Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0

The documentation on the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM is in the
Adobe Acrobat Portable Document Format (PDF). You can install
Adobe Acrobat Reader 3. from the CD-ROM. Windows NT 3.5x
users should install the Windows 3.1 version, and Windows NT 4.0
users should install the Windows 95 version.
1. Insert the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM into your PC. On

systems running Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0, the
XANTÉ Utilities Installer is launched automatically. Click
Cancel; then, click Exit Setup to quit the automatic installation
program.
2. Select Run from the File menu (Windows 3.1) or from the
Start menu (Windows 95), and use the Browse function to
select the Ar.exe file (Acrobat: Win31: Ar.exe or Acrobat:
Win95: Ar.exe) on the CD-ROM; then click OK.
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-7

3. Follow the instructions on each screen to complete the
installation.
4. See the Read1st.txt file on the CD-ROM and the Adobe

Acrobat 3.0 Readme file that is installed with the program on
your system.
Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers

Your XANTÉ printer features Adobe PostScript software. Before
using your printer, you must install the Adobe PostScript driver and
your printer’s PPD.
The XANTÉ Utilities Installer launches the installation program for

the most recent Adobe PostScript printer driver on systems running
Windows 3.1/3.11. It allows you to select the Adobe PostScript
printer driver to load on systems running Windows 95. This section
describes how to load the printer driver manually and using the
XANTÉ Utilities Installer. See “XANTÉ Utilities Installer” earlier in
this chapter to load XANTÉ Utilities manually. See “PDFs Folder“
later in this chapter to load QuarkXPress PDF files manually.
Windows 3.1 and 3.11 Printer Drivers

The AdobePS 3.0 driver supports Adobe PostScript Level 2; the
AdobePS 3.1 driver supports Adobe PostScript 3. This section
describes how to install and configure the printer driver and your
printer’s PPD.
Installing the AdobePS Printer Driver

1. The installation program for the most recent Adobe PostScript
printer driver is launched by the XANTÉ Utilities Installer. If you
cannot use the XANTÉ Utilities Installer or if you prefer to use the
earlier Adobe PostScript printer driver, use the following procedure
to launch the installation program for the driver.
4-8 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

a. Insert the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM into your PC.
b. Start Windows; then, close all Windows applications and

spooling programs.
c. Use File Manager to open the appropriate language

folder in the Drivers: Win31: Ps30 or Ps31 folder on the
CD-ROM and check the Readme file for updates before
beginning the installation.
d. Double-click the Setup.exe icon in the Ps30 or Ps31

folder on the CD-ROM to begin the installation.
e. Go to step 2 (AdobePS 3.1) or step 3 (AdobePS 3.0) to

continue the installation.
2. Read the license agreement and click Accept to continue the

AdobePS 3.1 installation. If you click Decline, the installation
program terminates.
3. Click Read to view the Readme file. When you close the
Readme file (or if you selected Skip instead of Read on the
README.WRI screen), the PostScript Printer Driver Setup
screen appears (fig. 4.1).
Fig. 4.1 The PostScript Printer Driver Setup Screen
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-9

4. Click Continue in the message box to load the AdobePS
printer driver on your system. If all Windows applications are
not closed, or if you do not want to overwrite existing Adobe
PostScript drivers, click Exit to terminate the installation.
5. Click Restart Windows when the installation is complete. After

restarting, continue the setup by installing the PPD.
Installing your Printer’s PPD

1. After loading the AdobePS printer driver and restarting
Windows, the Install PostScript Printer from PPD window may
appear (fig. 4.2). To open the window manually, double-click
the Adobe PostScript Printer icon (Red icon with the Adobe
logo) in the Control Panel window of the Main group.
Fig. 4.2 The Install PostScript Printer from PPD Dialog Box
2. Access the drive containing the CD-ROM and select the PPDs:
Level3: Win31 directory, if installing AdobePS 3.1, or the
PPDs: Level2: Win31 directory, if installing AdobePS 3.0.
Highlight your XANTÉ printer from the Printer Descriptions
Available box (fig. 4.2), and click Install.
3. Click OK in the successful installation dialog box.
4. Click Close in the Install PostScript Printer from PPD dialog box;
then click OK in the message box to return to the Control Panel
window. After installing the PPD, continue the setup by
configuring the PPD for the Windows 3.1/3.11 environment.
4-10 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

Configuring the PPD for Windows 3.1 and 3.11
After loading the AdobePS printer driver and the PPD, configure the
new printer as the default for Windows 3.1 applications.
1. Double-click Printers (not PostScript Printers) in the Control

Panel window. The Printers dialog box appears.
Fig. 4.3 The Printers Dialog Box
2. Highlight your XANTÉ printer in the Installed Printers box

and click Set as Default Printer.
3. Click Connect to set the Windows printing parameters.
Fig. 4.4 The Connect Dialog Box
a. Under Ports, select the port to which your printer is

connected.
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-11

b. Under Timeouts (seconds), make sure the settings are
Device Not Selected: 300 seconds

Transmission Retry: 900 seconds
c. Select the Fast Printing Direct to Port option, if you have

a Pentium PC. If not, be sure this option is not selected.
d. Click OK to return to the Printers dialog box (fig. 4.3).
4. Click Setup to define the printer and PostScript options.
5. Click the PostScript Tab to set PostScript parameters.
Fig. 4.5 The PostScript Tab Screen
a. Under Performance Options, select Use Language Level

2 or 3 Features and make sure Send Data in Binary is not
selected.
b. Under Margins, select Default.
c. Under Color Options, select Send Full Color Data.
d. Under Protocol Options, select Default-Serial/Parallel
4-12 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

e. Under PostScript Timeout Values, make sure settings are
Job Timeout - Seconds, set to 0

Wait Timeout-Seconds, set to 240
f. Under PostScript Performance, select Optimize for

Portability.
6. Click the Features Tab to configure your printer options. Use

the scroll bar on the left to locate the option and the scroll bar
on the right of each option to select the setting.
Fig. 4.6 The Features Tab Screen
a. Select the amount of RAM that is installed on your

printer in the InstalledMemory menu.
b. Select Installed for the upgrades that are installed on your

printer, such as optional trays, the extra wide print upgrade,
and the optional duplexer (Accel-a-Writer 8300 only).
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-13

c. Select True for Spooler Enabled to enable the Save
Spooled Job menu in your application Print dialog box.

d. Select the defaults to be used in your application Print

dialog box for the remaining printer features. See chapter
6, “PPD Settings,” for a description of these menus.
7. Click the Job Control Tab to configure print job defaults.
Fig. 4.7 The Job Control Tab Screen
a. Under Error Handler, select Send Error Handler with

each job.
b. Under PostScript Header, select Download Each Job.
8. Click OK to exit the Setup dialog box.
4-14 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

9. Click Close in the Printers dialog box; then close the Control
Panel window. After installing and configuring the AdobePS
printer driver and PPD, see “Configuring the Printer” later in
this chapter to verify that the printer interfaces are properly
configured.
Deleting Previous Driver Versions

Normally, you do not have to delete previous versions of the Adobe
PostScript printer driver for Windows or any previously installed
Adobe PostScript printers. However, if you suspect installation
problems, first remove your installed printers from the Printers
dialog box in the Windows Control Panel and reinstall them via the
Adobe PostScript Printers dialog box which is also in the Windows
Control panel.
If after removing and reinstalling your printers, you still experience

problems, delete all previous driver versions and reinstall your
printers using the Adobe PostScript Printers dialog box.
To delete a previous version of the driver
1. Exit Windows and go to DOS.
2. Delete the following files from both your Windows and

Windows: System directories.
Note: Your configuration may not include all these files, but
you need to delete the ones that are there.
*.EBF
*.PPB
*.PPD
*.PFM (delete the *.PFM files only if you did not place them
here using the ATM control panel or a font
installation program)
ADOBEPS?.*
RUN_ENUM.*
PSINSTDV.EXE
WINDOWN.EXE
PS_ENUM.*
DOWN.DLL
DWN.HLP
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-15
3. Restart Windows.
4. Use Notepad or another ASCII text editor to delete the

following entries from the Win.ini file in the Windows
directory. Only delete the lines indicated by notes in the right
column; the other lines are to help you locate the entries
[<printer_name>,<port>] <<<Delete this line

PrinterName=<printer_nickname> <<<Delete this line
[devices]
<printer-name>=ADOBEPS,<port> <<<Delete this line
[PrinterPorts]
<printer_name>=ADOBEPS,<port>,15,45,… <<<Delete this line
If the device= line in the [windows] section of the Win.ini file refers
to AdobePS, delete that line also.
Windows 95 Drivers
The AdobePS 4.1 driver supports Adobe PostScript Level 2; the
AdobePS 4.22 driver supports Adobe PostScript 3 and earlier. This
section describes how to install and configure these drivers without
using the XANTÉ Utilities Installer.
Installing the AdobePS Printer Driver and Printer PPD

1. The installation program for the selected Adobe PostScript
printer driver is launched by the XANTÉ Utilities Installer. If you
cannot use the XANTÉ Utilities Installer, use the following
procedure to launch the installation program for the driver.
a. Insert the XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM into your PC. The

XANTÉ Utilities Installer is launched automatically.
Click Cancel; then, click Exit Setup to quit the automatic
installation program.
b. Start Windows 95; then, close all Windows applications

and spooling programs.
4-16 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

c. Use Windows Explorer to open the appropriate language
folder in the Drivers: Win95: Ps41 or Ps422 folder on
the CD-ROM and check the Readme file for updates
before beginning the installation.
d. Double-click the Setup.exe icon in the Ps41 or Ps422

folder on the CD-ROM to begin the installation.
e. Go to step 2 (AdobePS 4.2) or step 3 (AdobePS 4.1) to

continue the installation.
Note: If you are installing AdobePS 4.1, select your PPD

from the PPDs: Level2: Win95 folder on the CD-
ROM.
2. Read the license agreement and click Accept to continue the

AdobePS 4.2 installation. If you click Decline, the installation
program terminates.
Fig. 4.8 The AdobePS Printer Driver Setup Dialog Box
3. Click Read to view the Readme file. When you close the
Readme file, click Next in the setup screen to continue the
installation (fig. 4.8).
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-17

4. Select Yes to copy the setup program to your hard drive
(recommended); then click Next.
Note: If you select No and click Next, skip to step 5 after the
AdobePS printer driver files are loaded.
5. Click Next to copy the AdobePS printer driver files and setup
program to the default directory on your PC.
6. Select Local, click Next, and skip to step 7 if the printer is

connected to your PC through the serial or parallel port. Select
Network, click Next, and go to step 6 if the printer is
connected to a network.
7. Use the Browse function or type the network path or queue

name in the Network Path screen; then click Next to bring up
the Install PostScript Printer from PPD dialog box (fig. 4.9) .
Check with your system administrator if you have questions
about the correct network information.
8. Access the drive containing the CD-ROM and select the PPDs:
Level3: Win95 folder in the PPDs folder, if installing the
AdobePS 4.2, or PPDs: Level2: Win95, if installing AdobePS
4.1. Select your XANTÉ printer from the list of printers and
click Next (fig. 4.9). Go to step 9 for a local printer or to step
10 for a networked printer.
Fig. 4.9 Select the XANTÉ PPD
4-18 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

9. Select the port through which your PC is connected to the
printer from the Available Ports box; then click Next.
Note: You can view or change the port configuration from

the Local Port Selection screen by clicking the
Configure Port button. See your system administrator
for information.
10. Set the following options in the Add Printer dialog box; then
click Next.
Fig. 4.10 The Add Printer Dialog Box
a. Use the default printer name or type in a name you

prefer.
b. Check Yes to set the printer as the default for Windows

95 applications.
c. Select Yes to print a test page or No to skip the test page

print.
11. Click OK to close the Printer Properties window. Then exit the
AdobePS printer driver installation program and the XANTÉ
Utilities Installer. After installing the AdobePS printer driver
and the PPD, continue the setup by configuring the PPD for
the Windows 95 environment.
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-19

Configuring the PPD for Windows 95
After installing the Adobe PostScript printer driver and PPD,
configure the PPD for your printer.
1. Click Start from the Windows 95 desktop; then click Settings;

then click Printers. The Printers window appears.
2. Highlight your XANTÉ printer model and click the right

mouse button. Click Properties from the drop-down menu.
3. Click the Device Options tab to configure your printer options.

Use the scroll bar in the Printer Features and Installable
Options sections to locate and highlight the options; then,
select the setting from the appropriate Change Setting for box.
Fig. 4.11 The Device Options Tab for Printer Properties
4-20 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

a. Select the defaults for the Properties menu in your
application Print dialog box from the Printer features
section. See chapter 6, “PPD Settings,” for a description
of these menus.
b. Select Installed for the upgrades that are installed on

your printer, such as optional trays, the extra wide print
upgrade, and the optional duplexer (Accel-a-Writer 8300
only).
c. Select True for Spooler Enabled to enable the Save

Spooled Job menu in your application Print dialog box.

d. Select the amount of RAM that is installed on your

printer using the VMOption menu.
4. Click the Graphics tab and set the printer’s default resolution.
5. Click the Details tab and make the following changes for a local
printer. These options are not available for a networked printer.
a. Under Timeout, make sure the settings are
Not Selected: 300

Transmission Retry: 900
b. Click Spool Setting and select the following options;

then click OK to close the Spool Settings Window.
Spool Data Format: RAW

Disable bidirectional support for this printer (selected)
6. Click the PostScript tab.
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-21

Fig. 4.12 The PostScript Tab for Printer Properties
a. In the PostScript output format box, select PostScript

(optimized for speed) if you have a Pentium processor. If
not, select PostScript (optimized for portability-ADSC).
b. Under PostScript header, select Download header with

each print job.
c. Under PostScript timeout values, make sure the setting are
Job timeout: 0
Wait timeout: 240
7. To print a test page, click the General tab; then click Print Test
Page.
8. Click OK to close the Printer Properties window.
4-22 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

9. Select Close from the File menu to exit the Printers window.
After installing and configuring the AdobePS printer driver
and PPD, see “Configuring the Printer” later in this chapter to
verify that the printer interfaces are properly configured.
Windows NT Drivers
Windows NT
Windows NT is a networking interface that supports systems running
Windows 3.1 and Windows 95. Each workstation on a Windows NT
network must be configured using the appropriate Adobe printer
driver for the operating system and the PPD for your printer.
Before you begin to set up your printer for Windows NT, install the
Adobe PostScript printer driver following the instructions earlier in
this chapter for the version of Windows that you are running. If you
use the XANTÉ Utilities Installer, after the installation of the utility
programs and the application files, a message indicates that there is
no Adobe printer driver available. Click OK in the Information
window; then, click Finish to exit the XANTÉ Utilities Installer
program.
The Winnt35 and Winnt40 folders in the Drivers folder on the

XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM contain installation instructions and files
to set up your printer in the Windows NT 3.5 and 4.0 environments.
Rather than attempt to cover each possible configuration, the following

example describes how to configure your printer for Windows NT 4.0
running on Windows 95. See the Readnt35.PDF file (Drivers: Winnt35)
or the Readnt40.PDF file (Drivers: Winnt40: Standard) on the CD-
ROM for additional information. You must have System Administrator
privileges to perform the Windows NT setup.
To set up your printer in Windows NT 4.0 on Windows 95
1. Copy the Oemprint.inf file from the Winnt40 folder in the

Drivers folder and the PPD for your printer from the Win95
folder in the PPD folder on the CD-ROM to a common
directory on your PC, network server, or a floppy disk.
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-23

2. Start Windows 95; close all applications and spooling
programs; then, click Start, Settings, Printers.
3. Double-click on Add Printer to bring up the Add Printer

Wizard.
4. Select My Computer and click Next to bring up the Ports

selection window (fig. 4.13).
Fig. 4.13 Port Selection Window
5. Select the port that connects your PC to the printer. A window

appears with a list of printers and manufacturers (fig. 4.14).
4-24 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

Fig. 4.14 Printer and Manufacturer Window
6. Click Have Disk and use the Browse function to find or type in
the path to the directory where you copied the Oemprint.inf
file in step 1. Click OK.
7. The Oemprint.inf file compiles a list of printers to install.

Select your printer from the list and click Next to bring up the
Printer Name window (fig. 4.15).
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-25

Fig. 4.15 The Printer Name Window
8. Enter the name that appears on your printer’s start-up page as

the Printer Name and specify whether this is to be your default
printer; then, click Next to bring up the Shared Printer window
(fig. 4.16).
Fig. 4.16 The Shared Printer Window
4-26 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

9. Select Shared if the printer is connected to a network. Then,
select the operating systems for all computers that will send
files to the printer from the list in the bottom window. Select
Not shared if the printer is connected directly to your PC.
Click Next to bring up the Print Test Page window (fig. 4.17).
Fig. 4.17 The Print Test Page Window
10. Select Yes to print a test page; then, click Finish. The Add
Printer Wizard copies the required files and prompts you for
the Windows NT CD-ROM.
11. Click OK even if you do not have the CD-ROM. When the Add
Printer Wizard prompts you to find files, click on Browse and
find the directory from which you installed Windows NT or
the directory which contains Pscript.DLL (for example:
C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\SPOOL\DRIVERS\W32X86); then,
click OK.
12. Follow the instructions on screen to complete the installation.
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-27

Configuring the Printer
If necessary, configure the printer’s communication interface using
the front panel.
1. Select the SETUP:INTERFACES menu.
2. Select the menu for the printer interface that is connected to

your computer (SERIAL, PARALLEL, LPR, or NOVELL
PSERVER).
3. Select the ENABLE menu.
5. Press the Reset key until READY/IDLE appears in the display.
See Chapter 5, “Configuration,” for additional information about

using the front panel menus, the Ethernet Upgrade manual for
information about configuring the Ethernet options, and “XANTÉ
Command Center” later in this chapter for information about
configuring communication for that utility.
PDFs Folder
This folder contains PDFs (Printer Description Files) for each XANTÉ
printer. These files are required by QuarkXPress in addition to the PPD.
Use these XANTÉ PDFs to ensure the highest quality output from your
printer and QuarkXPress.
The XANTÉ Utilities Installer loads the QuarkXPress PDF. To load

these PDFs manually

Printer Drivers” earlier in this chapter.
4-28 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

2. Copy your printer’s PDF from the PDFs folder to the
Xpress\PDF directory on your PC by typing the following
command, substituting the drive letter containing the XANTÉ
Utilities CD-ROM for [Drive].
COPY [Drive]:\PDFS\????.PDF C:\XPRESS\PDF ↵
Note: The name of the PDF indicates the XANTÉ printer it

supports. A “W” after the name indicates the PDF is
for use on printers with the wide format option.
See the QuarkXPress section in appendix B.
PS_Files Folder
This directory contains Adobe PostScript files to help setup and
maintain your printer and a PDF file, Overview.PDF, which
describes these files.
These files can be downloaded to your printer using the Send

PostScript File option in XANTÉ Command Center (see “XANTÉ
Command Center” later in this chapter) or by typing the following
DOS command, substituting a different port, if necessary:
COPY FILENAME.PS LPT1 ↵
The Clean.ps file prints cleaning instructions for the Accel-a-Writer

8100, 8200, and PlateMaker II.
The CT4_cal.ps file prints instructions for performing color

calibration of the CT4 from a Macintosh and a PC.
D.ps contains a Control-D (PostScript’s end-of-job marker) for use

with applications that do not send a PostScript end-of-file.
The Ftp.ps file prints instructions for uploading and downloading

files to XANTÉ’s FTP (File Transfer Protocol) site.
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-29

The Initdisk.ps files are used to initialize hard disks attached to or
installed in your printer.
number (Initdsk1.ps intializes SCSI disk #1, Initdsk2.ps
• The Initdska.ps and Initdskb.ps files initialize the internal IDE
drive of the same designation (the A or B disk) on the printer.
to the printer.
Initializing a disk erases all information stored on the disk. See

“Initializing a Hard Disk” in chapter 2.
The Novell34.ps file prints instructions for setting up a XANTÉ

printer on a Novell network.
The Parmdump.ps file prints a list of the settings for the

communication devices currently configured for your printer. If you
call XANTÉ Technical Support, you may be asked to print this page
to check your setup.
The Setzone.ps file allows you to set the EtherTalk zone name for
the printer. Open the file in a text editor and change “name of zone”
in the parentheses to the name of your EtherTalk zone. Save the file,
and download it to your printer. The printer must be restarted before
the change is effective.
The Set_IP.ps file allows you to set the IP address for your printer.
Open the file in a text editor and change the IP address in the
parentheses to the IP address of your printer. Save the file, and
download it to your printer. The printer must be restarted before the
change is effective.
The Startpg.off file disables the printer’s start-up page feature,

which prevents it from printing automatically each time the printer is
restarted (see “Startup Page Menu” in chapter 5).
4-30 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

The Startpg.on file enables the startup page feature, which causes it
to print automatically each time the printer is restarted (see “Startup
Page Menu” in chapter 5).
Sysparm.ps file prints a list of the current system parameters. If you

call XANTÉ Technical Support, you may be asked to print this page to
check your setup.
XANTÉ Command Center

XANTÉ Command Center allows you to check and control many of
the printer’s functions from your PC. The File and Help menus are
similar to other Windows applications and are not described in this
section.
Configuration for XANTÉ Command Center

In a PC environment, XANTÉ Command Center cannot be run
across a network, use the following procedure to set up the
communication between the program and the printer. See Chapter 5,
“Configuration,” for additional information.
1. Connect your printer to your computer through the parallel or

serial port. Command Center cannot be run through a network
connection.
2. Configure the printer’s communication interface for Command

Center using the front panel. The printer’s serial and parallel
interfaces are enabled as the factory default, so this step may
not be necessary.
a. Select the SETUP:INTERFACES menu.
b. Select the menu for the printer interface that is connected

to your computer (SERIAL or PARALLEL).
c. Select the ENABLE menu.
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-31

d. Select the YES option.
e. Press the On Line key to return the printer to the

READY/IDLE state.
3. Double-click the XANTÉ Command Center icon to open the

program.
4. Setup Command Center to communicate with the printer.
a. From the Command Center Ports menu, select COMX to

set up a serial connection or LPTX to setup a parallel
connection to the printer.
b. From the Select Product menu of the Controller menu,

select your printer.
5. Select Exit from the File menu to close XANTÉ Command

Center.
The Options Menu

This menu allows you to change the screen colors for XANTÉ
Command Center.
The Controller Menu

This menu allows you to perform page and line length calibrations,
get information about printer settings and status, download
PostScript files to the printer, set network parameters, and change
some printer default settings (fig. 4.18).
4-32 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

Fig. 4.18 Controller Menu Options
Select Product
This option allows you to select the printer to configure. Your PC
must be directly connected to the printer’s serial or parallel port to
use XANTÉ Command Center. See “Configuration for XANTÉ
Command Center” earlier in this chapter.
General
These menu options allow you to receive information about the
printer’s status, perform diagnostics and troubleshooting, and set
some network parameters.
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-33

Fig. 4.19 General Menu Options
• Chat—a diagnostic communication tool, to be used only as
directed by XANTÉ Technical Support. This Chat menu only
works through a serial connection between the PC and printer.
• Get Info—provides on screen information about the current
printer status.
– The General screen gives the product name, the PostScript
version, the amount of RAM installed, the margin (Page
Align) settings, and the size and status of storage devices
configured on the printer.
– The Diagnostic screen provides an update on the status of
the EEPROM.
– The Product Information screen lists the product name.
• I/O Timeout—allows you to select the number of seconds the
printer waits for additional incoming data before cancelling a job
and returning to the idle state, ready to accept another job.
• Print Info—allows you to print a copy of the same information
available through Get Info.
• Receive Queue—gives you access to a buffer that stores
PostScript processing information. Check this file for
information if you receive a PostScript error while printing a file.
4-34 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

• Reset Controller—allows you to reboot your printer from your
computer. This option causes the printer to go through the
initialization process.
• Send Ctrl-D—sends a Control-D (PostScript’s end-of-job
marker) to the printer.
• Send PostScript File—allows you to download PostScript files
to your printer.
• Set Printer Name—allows you to rename your printer on a
network other than Novell. Your printer’s default name is the
product name, which can be confusing on networks where there
may be more than one printer of the same model.
• Status—provides a fast, easy method to check current printer
status. For example, it can indicate if your printer is idle and
ready to receive and process new data or busy.
• TCP/IP Address—allows you to set the address or enable the
LPR interface on the optional Ethernet port.
• Update PPD Fonts—allows you to add all of your downloaded
fonts to your current PPD (PostScript Printer Driver). Your PPD
should be updated using this menu anytime you download fonts to
the printer. This allows you to use the downloaded fonts as printer
resident and to avoid packaging these font files with print jobs.
Align Paper
This option allows you to adjust the printer margin. Printer margin
refers to the page’s imageable area, not to the margin settings in an
application. The imageable area is the portion of a page on which the
printer can lay down toner. Align Paper allows you to adjust the
position of this imageable area. See “Printer Margin Adjustment”
later in this chapter for detailed instructions.
CRD Directory
This option is grayed out for laser printers; it is for use only with
XANTÉ’s wide-format hardware RIP, the Accel-a-Graphix CT4. It
allows you to manage the CRD library on the Accel-a-Graphix
CT4’s hard drive.
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-35

Linearize
This menu allows you to create and download custom curves to your
printer. These curves can be selected for a specific job from the Print
dialog box or set as the default from the printer’s front panel. See
“Calibration with a Densitometer” later in this chapter for details.
Spooler
printer’s hard drive. Spooling frees up the communication channel
between your PC and printer which permits your computer to return
to other processing quickly. Spooling can be enabled for each
interface independently using this menu or the Interface menus on
the printer’s front panel. See “The Spooler” later in this chapter for
details.
Novell
This menu allows you to configure the Novell Print Server emulation
on your printer’s optional Ethernet interface. These options should
be used only by your Network Administrator. See the Ethernet
Upgrade manual for details.
Fig. 4.20 The Novell Menu Options
Add File Server—allows you to specify up to four Novell file servers

for your printer to poll for print jobs.
4-36 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

Delete filer Server—allows you to delete specific Novell file servers
from the list that your printer polls for print jobs.
Delete All File Servers—allows you to delete all Novell file servers
from the list that your printer polls for print jobs.
Printing—Allows you to enable and disable printing and file server

login functions for your printer’s Novell Print Server emulation over
the Ethernet interface.
Set Print Server Login Name—allows you to set the name your
printer uses when logging into a Novell file server.
Set Print Server Password—allows you to set the password you

printer uses to login to a Novell file server.
Test Directory
XANTÉ’s wide-format hardware RIP, the Accel-a-Graphix CT4. It
allows you to manage the CRD library on the Accel-a-Graphix
CT4’s hard drive. This option allows you to store files on the Accel-
a-Graphix CT4’s hard disk for access from the front panel.
Transfer Curve
XANTÉ’s wide-format hardware RIP, the Accel-a-Graphix CT4.
This menu allows you to create and control calibration curves for up
to four printers controlled by the Accel-a-Graphix CT4.
X•ACT
This option allows you to calibrate the horizontal and vertical
dimensions of your printer’s output to a standard. See “Accurate
Calibration Technology” later in this chapter for details about using
XANTÉ’s patent pending X•ACT feature.
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-37

The Ports Menu
This menu allows you to select the PC port through which you are
connected to the printer for XANTÉ Command Center.
Fig. 4.21 The Ports Menu
See “Configuration for XANTÉ Command Center” earlier in this

chapter.
The XANTÉ Linearization Tool

The XANTÉ Linearization Tool allows you to create a file that
adjusts your printer’s grayscale output to a linear standard using
densitometer measurements. This file is downloaded to the printer as
a custom gamma curve using XANTÉ Command Center.
Fig. 4.22 The XANTÉ Linearization Tool Menu
See “Calibration with a Densitometer” later in this chapter.
4-38 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

Procedures
This section contains instructions for performing common
procedures using the programs provided in the XANTÉ Utilities.
The Spooler
Spooling can be enabled for each interface independently through
XANTÉ Command Center or the Interface menus on the printer’s
front panel. XANTÉ Command Center also allows you to manage
the jobs in the spooler print queue. See chapter 8, “Advanced
Features,” for additional information.
Using the Front Panel

The Spooler can be enabled using the Spooler menu of the interface
that you will be using (see chapter 5, “Configuration,” for additional
information).
1. Select the Interface (SETUP:INTERFACES) menu.
2. Select the printer interface (SERIAL, PARALLEL,

ETHERTALK, LPR, or NOVELL PSERVER) that you use to
send files.
3. Select the Spool menu.
5. Press the On Line key to return the printer to the

READY/IDLE state.
Using XANTÉ Command Center

printer’s hard drive.
To Enable the Spooler
1. Open XANTÉ Command Center and select Spooler from the

Controller menu to open the Spooler window.
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-39

Fig. 4.23 The Configure Menu in the Spooler Window
2. Choose Spool Device from the Configure menu (fig. 4.23) to

open the Select Spool Device window (fig. 4.24).
Fig. 4.24 The Select Spool Device Window
3. Select the disk to store the spooled jobs or select NONE to

disable spooling; then click OK. The spool device is setup;
then the Spooler window reappears (fig. 4.23).
4-40 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

4. Choose I/O Interfaces to Spool from the Configure menu in the
Spooler window to open the Select I/O Interfaces to Spool
window (fig. 4.25).
Fig. 4.25 The Select I/O Interfaces to Spool Window
5. Select the interface that you use to send files to the printer;
then click OK. The I/O interface is set up; then the Spooler
window reappears (fig. 4.23).
6. Click Close to exit the Spooler menu; then select Exit from the
File menu to close XANTÉ Command Center.
To manage jobs in the spooler’s job queue

The spooler’s job queue can store up to 250 jobs. Jobs sent with the
Save Spooled Job option set to True in the Print dialog box are
retained indefinitely in the queue (see chapter 6, “PPD Settings”). A
saved job can be reprinted quickly from the Spooling menu without
reprocessing the file through an application.
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-41

1. Open XANTÉ Command Center and select Spooler from the
Controller menu to open the Spooler Window (fig. 4.26).
Fig. 4.26 The Spooler Window and Job Queue
Note: The Job queue lists the job ID, job status, job title,
spool device, and file size of all jobs in the spooling
queue. Job status can be W (waiting to be processed),
P (currently processing), or H (already processed and
held using the Save Spooled Job feature).
2. Use the Control buttons to manage the jobs in the queue.

Print Prints the highlighted job (used to print
saved jobs)
Delete Deletes the highlighted job
Delete All Deletes all jobs in the queue
Move to Front Moves the highlighted job to the top of the
queue
Refresh Updates the screen with the current job
queue
3. Click Close to exit the Spooler Window; then select Exit from
the File menu to close XANTÉ Command Center.
4-42 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

Calibration with a Densitometer
You can create up to seven custom gamma curves and download these
to your printer, in addition to the seven standard curves supplied with
XANTÉ’s Halftone Calibration Technology. The Linear option on the
printer’s front panel Gamma menu allows you to select Custom Gamma
0 as your printer’s default. The Gamma PPD option in the Print dialog
box allows you to select any of the custom gamma curves or any of the
standard gamma curves on a job by job basis (see “The Gamma Menu”
in chapter 5, “Gamma” in chapter 6, and “Halftone Calibration
Technology” in chapter 8 for details).
Custom curves can be used to adjust your printer’s performance to

eliminate inconsistencies due to equipment age, different inks and
media, and environmental conditions. These curves are created using
XANTÉ Command Center, the XANTÉ Linearization Tool, and a
densitometer using the following steps:
• Printing a Calibration Strip
• Using the Densitometer
• Linearizing the Densitometer Data
• Creating a Custom Gamma Curve
Printing a Calibration Strip

The first step in calibrating your printer is to print a calibration strip to
measure the printer’s current performance as a basis for the calibration.

Controller menu to open the Linearize window.
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-43

2. Set the Number of Patches to print. The default setting of 11

prints a calibration strip with levels of gray at 10% increments.
3. Click Print Calibration Strip (fig. 4.27). The calibration strip

shows the printer’s performance using no gamma curve
correction.
4. Click Close to close the Linearize window; then select Exit

from the File menu to quit XANTÉ Command Center.
Using the Densitometer

A densitometer uses a standard light source to measure the amount of
light reflected from printer output. This measurement is compared to
a standard and expressed as a percentage of gray.
The densitometer, like any other precision instrument, must be

calibrated before each use. After calibrating the densitometer, use it
to get density measurements for the calibration strip you printed.
Refer to the documentation of the model you are using for
instructions on calibrating and using the densitometer.
Note: Make sure that the densitometer reads measurements for dot
area, not dot density. If you have any questions regarding
this matter, refer to the documentation that came with your
densitometer.
4-44 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

Linearizing the Densitometer Data
The XANTÉ Linearization Tool uses the densitometer measurements
to calculate the adjustments necessary to correct printer performance
to a linear standard.
1. Open the XANTÉ Linearization Tool and select Generic B&W

from the Device menu to open that window.
Generic B/W Device
Device Data Display

100% Background
90%
80%
70%
60%
50%
40% R G B
30%
20% Save As
10%
0% Graph Close
Clear
Fig. 4.28 The Generic B&W Device Main Window
2. Enter the measurements from the densitometer next to the

corresponding percentages in the Device Data section.
3. Click Graph to display a curve of your printer’s performance

and the standard linear curve.
4. Click Save As. Specify a file name, select a directory on your

system, and click OK to save the file.
5. Click Close to close the Generic B/W Device window; then

select Exit from the File menu to close the Linearization Tool.
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-45

Creating a Custom Gamma Curve
Use XANTÉ Command Center to create and automatically download
a custom gamma curve by merging the Linearization file you created
with a custom gamma curve on your printer. The new custom curve
adjusts your printer’s performance to a linear standard for the
specific conditions (ink, media, and environment) at the time you
printed the calibration strip.

Controller menu to open the Linearize window.
Fig. 4.29 The Linearize Window
2. Click Load (fig. 4.29) to open a file list window.
3. Locate and highlight the file you created in the Linearization

Tool; click OK to select the file and return to the Linearization
window.
4. From the Update Transfer Curve list (fig. 4.29), select the
custom gamma curve to update on the printer.
5. Click Linearize to create a new curve and download it to your

printer. The new curve replaces the existing curve of the same
name on the printer.
4-46 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

6. Print another calibration strip and measure it with the
densitometer to verify the accuracy of the curve you created. If
the measured densities differ from the standards by more than
3%, repeat the calibration process.
7. Click Close to close the Linearization window; then select

Exit from the File menu to quit XANTÉ Command Center.
Note: To reset a custom gamma curve to the factory default (a

copy of the standard Gamma 0 curve), highlight the curve in
the Update Transfer Curve list and click Reset Curve (K).

This option allows you to calibrate printed line lengths using XANTÉ’s
patent pending X•ACT feature. Your printer is calibrated before it is
shipped, but it may drift out of alignment over time. After using X•ACT
to calibrate the line lengths, always adjust the alignment of the
imageable area using the Align Paper option in XANTÉ Command
Center.
1. Open XANTÉ Command Center; then select X•ACT from the

Controller menu to open the X•ACT window.
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-47

Fig. 4.30 The X•ACT Screen
2. Select the media size from the Paper menu (Fig. 4.30).
3. Click Update/Print to print a page with a horizontal and a

vertical line on it. Click OK in the X•ACT message box.
4. Turn the test page so that the large and small crosses are
aligned with one another as they are on the X•ACT
Calibration screen (fig. 4.30).
5. Measure the horizontal line. Adjust the horizontal slide bar on

the X•ACT screen until the measured length of the line is
displayed to the right of the bar.
6. Measure the vertical line. Adjust the vertical slide bar on the
X•ACT screen until the measured length of the line is
displayed above the bar.
7. Click Update/Print. When the new page prints, measure the

lines. They should be the correct lengths. If not, repeat steps 5,
6, and 7 until the measurements are correct.
8. Click Close to return to the XANTÉ Command Center main

menu; then adjust the printer margins using the following
procedure.
4-48 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

Printer Margin Adjustment
The Align Paper option allows you to adjust the printer margin,
which is the position of the imageable area on the media. Your
printer is calibrated before it is shipped, but it may drift out of
alignment over time. Always adjust the alignment of the imageable
area on the page after using X•ACT Calibration.
Note: Use the standard paper size (letter or A4) for your paper
cassette with the Align Paper function.
1. Open XANTÉ Command Center, if necessary and select Align

Paper from the Controller menu to open the Align Paper
window.
Fig. 4.31 Align Printer Margins
2. Click Print Test to print an alignment test page prints. Click

OK in the Alignment message box.
3. Turn the test page so that -x is to the left and -y is at the top
of the crossed lines (fig. 4.31).
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-49

4. Check the current settings that printed near the crossed lines.
The factory default is x = 0, y = 0, which should cause each
line to print 1" (25.4 mm) from the edge of the page.
The coordinates are listed in units that indicate the change

from the factory default in dots per inch. When you make a
change using the slide bar, the coordinates at the bottom of the
screen display the change in the same units.
Note: If the current settings are not the factory defaults and
you must make adjustments to the coordinates, it may
be easier to reset the coordinates to the factory default
before beginning. To do this, click Reset Margins.
Then print another alignment test page (steps 1 and 2)
using the factory defaults.
5. Measure the distance from the edge of the page to the -x line.
This distance is dependent on the y coordinate.
• To move the -x line away from the edge of the page, move
the slide on the vertical slide bar up (toward the -y).
• To move the -x line toward the edge of the page, move the
slide on the vertical slide bar down (toward the +y).
6. Measure the distance from the edge of the page to the -y line.
This distance is dependent on the x coordinate.
• To move the -y line away from the edge of the page, move
the slide on the horizontal slide bar to the left (toward the -x).
• To move the -y line toward the edge of the page, move the
slide on the horizontal slide bar to the right (toward the +x).
7. Print another alignment page by clicking Print Test; then OK

in the Alignment message box.
8. Measure the -x and -y lines on the new test page. If the lines
are not each 1" (25.4 mm) from the edge of the paper, go back
to step 4 and repeat the process.
9. When the -x and -y lines are set correctly, click Close. Then,
select Exit from the File menu to exit Command Center.
4-50 PC Setupbb __________________________________________

Managing Fonts on an Optional Hard Disk
Your XANTÉ printer includes the Adobe PostScript 3 extended set
of 136 fonts. You can download additional fonts to the printer’s
memory or to an optional hard disk.
Fonts downloaded to your printer are considered resident, which

means applications do not have to bundle these fonts with print jobs.
Fonts downloaded to printer memory remain only through the
current power cycle. Fonts downloaded to an optional hard disk
survive a power cycle.
Caution: Fonts downloaded to memory may cause PostScript

errors due to insufficient memory. To resolve this,
download the fonts to the printer’s optional hard disk or
the memory in the printer.
To remove all downloaded fonts from printer memory, turn the

printer off and then back on. Fonts stored in printer memory only last
for the current power cycle.
To remove specific fonts downloaded to a hard disk, see the

documentation for your font downloader program. To remove all fonts
downloaded to a hard disk, reinitialize the disk by downloading the
Initdsk.ps file. See “Initializing a Hard Disk with the PC” in chapter 2.
◊◊◊
___________________________________________ PC Setup 4-51

4-52 PC Setupbb __________________________________________
Chapter 5 - Configuration
Chapter Overview
Introduction ..................................................................................... 5-3
Printer Control ................................................................................ 5-3
The Front Panel ............................................................................... 5-3
The Display Window ................................................................ 5-4
Front Panel Lights (LEDs) ....................................................... 5-4
Front Panel Keys ...................................................................... 5-5
The Configuration Menu Structure ................................................. 5-8
Selecting Menu Options ........................................................... 5-8
Resetting to Factory Defaults ................................................. 5-10
The Main Menus ........................................................................... 5-10
The Miscellaneous Menu .............................................................. 5-10
The Density Menu .................................................................. 5-11
The DPI Menu ........................................................................ 5-12
The Gamma Menu .................................................................. 5-12
The Initial Job Menu .............................................................. 5-12
The Jam Recover Menu .......................................................... 5-13
The Language Menu ............................................................... 5-13
The Manual Feed Menu ......................................................... 5-13
The NEIT Menu ..................................................................... 5-14
The RAM Disk Menu ............................................................. 5-14
The Font Accelerator Menu .................................................... 5-15
The Toner Page Menu ............................................................. 5-15
The Screen Menu .................................................................... 5-15
The Startup Page Menu .......................................................... 5-15
The Timeout Menu ................................................................. 5-16
The Tray Switch Menu ........................................................... 5-16
The 1200 DPI Menu ............................................................... 5-16
The Interfaces Menu ..................................................................... 5-17
The RS232 Menu .................................................................... 5-17
The Parallel Menu .................................................................. 5-19
The LocalTalk, EtherTalk, and LPR (Line Printer) Menus .... 5-20
The Novell PServer (Novell Print Server) Menu.................... 5-21
_______________________________________ Configuration 5-1

Notes
5-2 Configurationbb ______________________________________

Introduction
This chapter describes the printer’s front panel and explains how to
use it to configure printer features.
Printer Control
Many printer features can be set from the Print dialog box within an
application. These application settings override the printer’s default.
The default settings for the printer can be changed using the printer’s
front panel menus and, for some features, XANTÉ Command
Center.
This chapter describes how to configure your printer’s default

settings using the front panel. For information about setting the
options that are available from the Print dialog box, see chapter 6,
“PPD Options.” For information about using XANTÉ Command
Center, see chapter 3 (Macintosh) or chapter 4 (PC).
The Front Panel

The printer’s front panel has a display window, status lights, and
control keys (fig. 5.1).
ON LINE FORM RESET TEST MENU ENTER TRAY DUPLEX

FEED SELECT
™
® ® ™
DATA READY MANUAL DUPLEX

®
Fig. 5.1 The Printer Front Panel
When your printer is powered on, all the lights flash and the printer
performs self-diagnostic tests which take approximately 90 seconds.
If the start-up page is enabled (factory default), it prints. When
READY/IDLE appears in the window, the printer is ready to accept
a job.
_______________________________________ Configuration 5-3

The Display Window
The printer’s front panel window displays messages that indicate
printer status, request operator help, relay error or service information,
and display menu items (fig. 5.1).
Front Panel Lights (LEDs)

Front panel lights, called LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes), indicate
printer status (fig. 5.1). The following list explains what each LED
indicates when it is on or blinking.
DATA
The Data LED is on and does not blink when
the printer is receiving data. When it is
blinking, it indicates that the printer is
processing data.
READY
The Ready LED is on when the printer is
ready to receive data and stays on unless an
engine error occurs or the printer cover is
opened.
MANUAL
The Manual LED is on when the manual
feed tray is selected. (The manual feed tray
LED in the printer icon also is on when the
Manual feed tray is selected.)
The Duplex LED is on when the printer is in
DUPLEX edge or tumble duplexing mode for
double-sided printing. It is off when the printer
is in simplex mode for single-sided printing.
This LED is active only on a printer with the
duplexer properly installed.
ON LINE The On Line LED is lit when the printer is on

line and ready to receive and process a file. It
also may be on while you work within the
printer’s menu structure.

FORM
FEED
The Form Feed LED is lit when the printer
does not receive a form feed command at the
end of a page. If this happens, take the printer
off line and press the Form Feed key. After a
blank page is fed through the printer, press the
On line key to put the printer back on line.
The Printer Icon LEDs indicate which tray is
selected. Only one LED on this icon is lit at a
time. However, if the Manual Feed Tray LED
is on, the front panel’s Manual LED on the far
left will be on also. The bottom LED on this
icon is on only if the optional paper feeder and
cassette are installed and chosen as the media
source.
Front Panel Keys

Front panel keys provide a quick, convenient way to carry out
routine operations such as changing resolutions and to check or
change printer settings.
ON LINE The On Line key is used to take the printer on

and off line. The window reads
READY/IDLE when the printer is on line or
OFFLINE if it is off line. The printer must be
on line to receive data from your computer.
FORM
FEED
The Form Feed key allows you to feed a
blank page through the printer. Some hosts do
not issue a form feed command at the end of a
page. If this happens, take the printer off line
and press the Form Feed key; after a blank
page feeds, press the On line key to put the
printer back on line.
_______________________________________ Configuration 5-5

RESET The up arrow Reset ↑ key cancels a
processing job if you take the printer off line
and press the Reset ↑ key. In the configuration
menu structure, press the Reset ↑ key to back
out of the menus one level at a time.
TEST The left arrow Test ← key allows you to

print a start-up page when the printer off line,
not in the menu structure. In the menu
structure, press the Test ← key to scroll back
through options within the current menu or to
lower the numeric value option, such as the
Gamma setting.
ENTER The down arrow Enter ↓ key allows you to

select a menu or option within the menu
structure when it appears in the window.
When you select an option, the option name
switches to all capitalized letters in the
window.
MENU The right arrow Menu → key allows you to

enter the menu structure when READY/IDLE
or OFFLINE appears in the window and to
scroll forward through menus and options.
When you first press this key to enter the
structure, the last main menu you were in
displays. After each selection (using the Enter
↓ key), use the Menu → key to scroll through
the options at that level or to increase the
numeric value of an option, such the Gamma
setting.

TRAY
SELECT
The Tray Select key is used to change the
default paper tray. When you press this key,
the first tray that appears in the window is the
current tray selection. Press the Tray Select
key to toggle between trays. The options are
man feed (manual feed tray), cassette
(standard cassette), upper optional, and
lower optional. The last two selections
appear only if these optional trays are
installed.
Note: The tray options do not appear in all capital

letters in the display window. The print icon
LEDs indicate the current selection.
DUPLEX The Duplex key is used to set the printer for

simplex (single-sided) printing, edge-duplex
(double-sided, side-to-side, book style)
printing, or tumble (double-sided, flip chart
style) printing (Fig. 7.2). Press the Duplex key
to display the current selection in the window.
Press the Duplex key again to scroll through
the options. To select an option as the default,
press the Duplex key until the desired option is
displayed; then, press the Enter ↓ key or allow
the printer to return automatically to the
Ready/Idle state.
Note: The Duplex key options appear in lower

case letters in the window. The Duplex
LED is on if the printer is in edge- or
tumble-duplexing mode; it is off when in
simplex mode.
_______________________________________ Configuration 5-7

The Configuration Menu Structure
Use the configuration menus to set up and change your printer default
settings through the front panel. This section explains and gives an
example of configuring your printer using the menu structure and covers
resetting to factory defaults. The printer’s quick reference sheet in the
back of this manual illustrates the menu structure.
Selecting Menu Options

Use the front panel menus to set up your printer to communicate
with your host computer and to change printer default settings.
Note: Four printer keys have arrows to indicate their use within the
menu structure (the Reset ↑ key, the Enter ↓ key, the Menu
→ key, and the Test ← key). See “Front Panel Keys” earlier
in this chapter for details.
To enter the menu structure and make selections
1. Make sure the printer is on and idle.
2. Press the Menu → key to enter the menu structure. The last
main menu you were in appears in the window.
3. Continue pressing the Menu → key until the desired menu

appears.
4. Press the Enter ↓ key to select the desired menu and access the
next menu level down. One of the options within the selected
menu appears.
5. Press the Menu → key until the desired submenu/option

appears. If the option is not capitalized, go to step 6. If it is
capitalized, it is already the current selection. Go to step 7 to
make further selection or to step 8 to exit the menu structure.

6. Press the Enter ↓ key to select the desired option if it is not a
numeric value. If it is numeric, use the Test ← key to lower or
the Menu → key to raise it to the desired amount; then, press
the Enter ↓ key.
When selected, the option’s name changes from lowercase

letters to all capitalized letters. If you do not want to make
further selections, skip to step 8.
7. Use the Reset ↑, Test ←, Menu →, and the Enter ↓ keys to

select other desired options. Repeat steps 2 and 6 until you
make all desired selections.
8. Press the On Line key to save the changes, and put the printer
back on line, ready for printing. READY/IDLE appears in the
window.
Example: Changing resolution from 600 x 600 dpi to 1200 x 1200 dpi
1. Make sure the printer is on and idle.
2. Press the MENU → key until SETUP:MISCELLANEOUS

appears in the window.
3. Press the Enter ↓ key to select the Miscellaneous menu.
4. Press the Menu → key until MISCELLANEOUS:DPI appears

in the window.
5. Press the Enter ↓ key to enter the dpi menu.
6. Press the Menu → key until dpi:1200 1200 appears.
7. Press the Enter ↓ key to select dpi:1200 1200. The

selection changes to all capital letters, DPI:1200 1200, in
the window.
8. Press the On Line key. READY/IDLE appears in the window.
The printer’s default resolution is now 1200 x 1200 dpi.
_______________________________________ Configuration 5-9

Resetting to Factory Defaults
To reset printer options to factory default settings, turn off the
printer, hold in the On Line and Tray Select keys, turn on the printer,
and then release the keys after RESET 1 appears in the window.
The Main Menus

The printer’s front panel has two main configuration menus, the
Miscellaneous menu and the Interfaces menu.
• Miscellaneous menu (SETUP:MISCELLANEOUS) allows you
to set the defaults for printer features.
• Interfaces menu (SETUP:INTERFACES) allows you to set the
defaults for the printer’s three standard (RS-232, parallel, and
LocalTalk) and optional Ethernet interfaces.
The Miscellaneous Menu

The Miscellaneous (SETUP:MISCELLANEOUS) menu allows you
to set the defaults for printer features.
• DENSITY • MANUAL FEED • TIMEOUT
• DPI • NEIT (optional) • TRAY SWITCH
• GAMMA • RAM DISK • TONER PAGE
• INITIAL JOB • FONT ACCELERATOR
• JAM RECOVER • SCREEN • 1200 DPI
• LANGUAGE • STARTUP PAGE
Use the procedure in “Selecting Menu Options” earlier in this

chapter to select these submenus and their options.

SETUP
MISCELLANEOUS
ENTER
TEST MENU
MISCELLANEOUS MISCELLANEOUS MISCELLANEOUS MISCELLANEOUS

DENSITY DPI GAMMA INITIAL JOB

NEIT* MANUAL FEED LANGUAGE JAM RECOVER

RAM DISK FONT ACCELERATOR** SCREEN STARTUP PAGE

1200 DPI*** TONER PAGE TRAY SWITCH TIMEOUT
*NEIT is active only with negative print enabled in the PPD

**FONT ACCELERATOR menu is active only when RAMDISK is enabled for more than 1 MB
***1200 DPI menu is active only when the printer has 20 MB or more of RAM installed
Fig. 5.2 The Miscellaneous Menu
MISCELLANEOUS
DENSITY The Density Menu
7
6 The Density menu allows you to select density
5
4
3
settings to control the amount (density) of
2
1
toner laid down by the printer. The toner
density (darkness of the image) increases as
the number increases —1 is the lightest and 7
is the darkest. The factory default is 5. See
“Adjusting Toner Output” in chapter 7 for
details.
_______________________________________ Configuration 5-11

MISCELLANEOUS
DPI
The DPI Menu
600 x 600
1200 x 1200
The DPI menu allows you to select the default
printing resolution. The factory default is 600
x 600. 1200 x 1200 dpi can be selected if you
have the resolution upgrade installed.
Note: If you add a memory upgrade, higher

resolutions may appear in the DPI menu.
However, unless the corresponding
resolution upgrade has been added to your
printer, the copy will print incorrectly if
the higher resolution is selected.
MISCELLANEOUS
GAMMA The Gamma Menu
0
1
The Gamma menu allows you to use
2
3 XANTÉ’s Halftone Calibration Technology
4
5
6
to choose one of eight transfer curves to
linear control your printer output. Options are 0-6
and linear. O is no change; curves 1-5
progressively lighten the midrange grayscale
values; 6 is a negative print; and linear
allows you to use a custom curve created
with XANTÉ Linearizer and downloaded to
the printer. The factory default is 3.
See “Gamma” in chapter 6, “Gamma
Corrections” in chapter 8, and “Calibration
with a Densitometer” in chapter 3 (Macintosh)
or chapter 4 (PC).
MISCELLANEOUS
INITIAL JOB The Initial Job Menu
YES
no The Initial Job menu allows you to have the
printer execute a Sys/Start file, if one exists
on an external hard disk when the printer is
turned on. Options are to enable (YES) or to
disable (NO) this feature. The factory
default is YES.
MISCELLANEOUS
JAM RECOVER The Jam Recover Menu
yes
NO The Jam Recover menu allows you to enable
(YES) or to disable (NO) the feature that
reprints the last page processed after a paper
jam is cleared. When enabled, Jam Recover
works as long as you do not turn off the power
to the printer while removing the jam. The
factory default is NO.
MISCELLANEOUS
LANGUAGE The Language Menu
ENGLISH
espanol
The Language menu allows you to select the
francais
deutsch
language used in the printer’s display window.
japanese
The factory default is ENGLISH.
MISCELLANEOUS
MANFEED The Manual Feed Menu
LETTER
legal The Manual Feed menu allows you to select
a4
b5
b4
the size media which is manually fed to the
11x17
a3
printer. The factory default is LETTER.
executive
12x25
com10 env To print on a size of media that is not listed in
monarch env
dl env the Manual Feed menu, select the paper size
c5 env
through an application. Application selections
override front panel settings.
Note: With the extra wide print feature, some

larger pages convert to wider imageable
area printing. To print with the standard
areas, select the page sizes through an
application by entering the page sizes. See
“Media Sizes” in chapter 7 for details.
_______________________________________ Configuration 5-13

MISCELLANEOUS
NEIT The NEIT Menu
0
1
…
If your printer has the NEIT upgrade, use this
10
…
menu to reduce the plugging (filling in) of tiny
20
white spaces inside letters such as a or e and in
hairline images. Options are 0 to 20;
increasing the number decreases the amount of
plugging. The factory default is 10. See
“Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology” in
chapter 8 for details about this patent pending
option from XANTÉ.
Note: Negative Print must be set to True in the

PPD for the NEIT menu setting to take
effect.
MISCELLANEOUS
RAM DISK The RAM Disk Menu
0 MEG
1 meg
2 meg
The RAM Disk menu allows you to set aside a
…
(maximum)
section of printer RAM to be used as a
read/write device for downloading fonts and
implementing XANTÉ’s Font Accelerator.
Options are 0 (which turns off RAM disk) and
1 MB increments to the maximum available
RAM (installed RAM minus RAM required
by the system). The factory default is 0. The
printer must be cycled (turned on and off) for
the selections to become effective. See “Font
Accelerator and RAM Disk” in chapter 8.

MISCELLANEOUS
FONT ACCELERATOR The Font Accelerator Menu
0%
20%
40%
The Font Accelerator menu allows you to set
60%
80%
aside a percentage of available RAM disk
100%
space to store recently used fonts for fast
system access. Fonts must be downloaded to a
hard disk attached to the printer, RAM disk
must be enabled for at least 1 MB or more,
and the system must have a minimum of 12
MB of RAM available. The factory default is
100%. See “Font Accelerator and RAM Disk”
in chapter 8.
MISCELLANEOUS
TONER PAGE The Toner Page Menu
YES
no The Toner Page menu allows you to enable
(YES) or disable (NO) automatic printing of a
toner reorder form when toner gets low. If
enabled and toner is low, the low toner page
prints every 250 pages. The factory default is
YES.
MISCELLANEOUS
SCREEN The Screen Menu
NORMAL
enhanced 145lg
enhanced 197lg
The Screen menu allows you to use XANTÉ’s
enhanced 256lg Enhanced Screening Technology to increase
the number of levels of gray produced for a
line screen setting. The factory default of
NORMAL uses the line screen setting of your
application. See “Levels of Gray” and
“Enhanced Screening” in chapter 8.
MISCELLANEOUS
STARTUP PAGE The Startup Page Menu
YES
no The Startup Page menu allows you to enable
(YES) or to disable (NO) automatic printing of
the start-up page each time the printer is
turned on. The factory default is YES.
_______________________________________ Configuration 5-15

MISCELLANEOUS
TIMEOUT The Timeout Menu
20 sec
40 SEC The Timeout menu allows you to select the
60 sec
300 sec
never
number of seconds the printer waits for
additional incoming data before cancelling a
job and returning to the Ready/Idle state to
accept another job. This prevents an indefinite
tie-up on one job. The factory default is 40
SEC.
Select 300 or NEVER for large files, such as
graphic intensive or CAD (Computer Aided
Design) files. With the NEVER selection, the
printer does not time out; it continues to wait
for additional data.
MISCELLANEOUS
TRAY SWITCH The Tray Switch Menu
OFF
normal The Tray Switch menu allows you to use the
manual feed
printer’s tray chaining feature. NORMAL
enables tray chaining to all installed paper
cassettes. MANUAL FEED enables tray
chaining to all installed paper cassettes and the
manual feed tray. The factory default is OFF,
which disables tray chaining. See “Tray
Chaining” in chapter 7.
MISCELLANEOUS
1200 DPI The 1200 DPI Menu
ENABLE
disable The 1200 DPI menu allows you to turn on
(ENABLE) or turn off (DISABLE) RAM set
aside for 1200 dpi printing. If your printer has
20 MB or more memory, the RAM is
configured to allow full frame buffering for
1200 dpi. If you do not have or do not want to
use 1200 dpi resolution, use this menu to
reallocate the memory. The factory default is
ENABLE.

The Interfaces Menu
The Interfaces menu (SETUP:INTERFACES) allows you to set the
defaults for the printer’s three standard (RS232, parallel, and LocalTalk)
and optional Ethernet interface. This menu includes following submenus.
• RS232 • ETHERTALK
• PARALLEL • LPR (Line Printer)
• LOCALTALK • NOVELL PSERVER (Novell Print
Server)
SETUP
INTERFACES
ENTER
TEST MENU
INTERFACES INTERFACES INTERFACES

RS232 PARALLEL LOCALTALK
INTERFACES INTERFACES INTERFACES

NOVELL PSERVER LPR ETHERTALK
Fig. 5.3 The Interfaces Menu
Use the procedure in “Selecting Menu Options” earlier in this

chapter to select these submenus and their options.
INTERFACES
RS232 The RS232 Menu
ENABLE
MODE
The RS232 menu allows you to enable and
BAUD RATE
PARITY configure the RS232 serial interface
FLOW CONTROL
DATA BITS communication settings for your printer.
STOP BITS
SPOOL
_______________________________________ Configuration 5-17

RS232
ENABLE The Enable Menu
YES
The Enable menu allows you to enable (YES)
no or to disable (NO) the RS232 interface. The
factory default is YES.
RS232
MODE
The Mode Menu
The Mode menu allows you to select
PS STD
ps bin PostScript Standard (PS STD), PostScript
ps tbcp
Binary (PS BIN), or PostScript Tagged Binary
Communication Protocol (PS TBCP) for files
sent to the printer’s RS232 interface. The
factory default is PS STD.
RS232 The Baud Rate Menu

BAUD RATE
The Baud Rate menu allows you to select a
1200
9600 baud rate of 1200, 9600, and 19200. The
19200
factory default is 9600.
RS232 The Parity Menu

PARITY
The Parity menu allows you to select the
NONE
odd parity for the printer’s serial interface to agree
even
mark
space
with the host computer. The factory default is
NONE.
RS232
FLOW CONTROL The Flow Control Menu
XON/XOFF
dtr
The Flow Control menu allows you to select
XON/XOFF (software) or DTR (hardware)
flow control. The factory default is
XON/XOFF.
RS232
DATA BITS
The Data Bits Menu
The Data Bits menu allows you to select either
8
7 7 or 8 data bits. The factory default is 8.

RS232 The Stop Bits Menu
STOP BITS
The Stop Bits menu allows you to select the
1
2
stop bit setting for your printer’s serial
interface to agree with the setting on your host
computer. The factory default is 1.
RS232
SPOOL The Spool Menu
YES
The Spool menu allows you to enable (YES)
no
or to disable (NO) the spooling feature on the
RS232 interface. The factory default is NO.
See “The Spooler” in chapter 3 (Macintosh) or
chapter 4 (PC).
INTERFACES
PARALLEL The Parallel Menu
ENABLE
MODE
The Parallel menu allows you to enable and
SPOOL configure your printer’s parallel interface.
PARALLEL
ENABLE The Enable Menu
YES
The Enable menu allows you to enable
no (YES) or to disable (NO) the printer’s
parallel interface on your printer. The
factory default is YES.
PARALLEL The Mode Menu

MODE
The Mode menu allows you to select
PS TBCP
ps bin
PostScript Standard (PS STD), PostScript
ps std Binary (PS BIN), or PostScript Tagged Binary
Communication Protocol (PS TBCP) for files
sent to the printer’s parallel interface. The
factory default is PS TBCP.
PARALLEL
SPOOL The Spool Menu
YES
no or to disable (NO) the spooling feature for the
parallel interface. The factory default is NO.
See “The Spooler” in chapter 3 (Macintosh) or
chapter 4 (PC).
_______________________________________ Configuration 5-19

INTERFACES
XXXX*
The LocalTalk, EtherTalk, and
ENABLE LPR (Line Printer) Menus
MODE
SPOOL
The LocalTalk menu allows you to configure
* XXXX = LTALK, ETALK, or LPR
the printer’s LocalTalk interface. The
EtherTalk and LPR menus allow you to
configure the printer’s Ethernet interface.
XXXX*
ENABLE
The Enable Menu
YES
no or to disable (NO) the printer’s LocalTalk
interface and the EtherTalk and Line Printer
* XXXX = LTALK, ETALK, or LPR protocols on the printer’s Ethernet interface.
The factory default for LocalTalk is YES. The
factory default for EtherTalk and LPR is YES
if the Ethernet board is installed properly.
XXXX*
MODE
The Mode Menu
The Mode menu specifies PostScript
PS STD
Standard (PS STD) as the active printer
mode for files sent to the printer’s LocalTalk
* XXXX = LTALK, ETALK, or LPR or Ethernet interface.
XXXX*
SPOOL
The Spool Menu
YES
no or to disable (NO) the spooling feature for the
printer’s LocalTalk or Ethernet interface. The
* XXXX = LTALK, ETALK, or LPR factory default is NO. See “The Spooler” in
chapter 3 (Macintosh) or chapter 4 (PC).

INTERFACES
NOVELL PSERVER The Novell PServer (Novell
ENABLE
MODE
Print Server) Menu
PROTOCOL
SPOOL
TIMEOUT
The Novell PServer menu allows you to
enable and configure the printer’s Ethernet
interface for Novell Print Server emulation.
NOVELL PSERVER
ENABLE
The Enable Menu
YES
no or to disable (NO) the Novell Printer Server
emulation on the printer’s Ethernet interface.
The factory default is NO.
NOVELL PSERVER
MODE
The Mode Menu
The Mode menu specifies PostScript Standard
PS STD
(PS STD) as the active printer mode for files
sent using the Novell Print Server protocol on
the Ethernet port.
NOVELL PSERVER
PROTOCOL
The Protocol Menu
802.3 The Protocol Menu allows you to select 802.3
no snap
or 802.2 (NO SNAP) as the Novell protocol
frame type used on your network. The factory
default is 802.3.
NOVELL PSERVER
SPOOL
The Spool Menu
YES
no
or to disable (NO) the spooling feature for the
Novell Print Server emulation on the Ethernet
interface. The factory default is NO. See “The
Spooler” in chapter 3 (Macintosh) or chapter 4
(PC).
_______________________________________ Configuration 5-21

NOVELL PSERVER
TIMEOUT
The Timeout Menu
The Timeout menu allows you to set a timeout
5 min
10 min for the Novell Print Server emulation. If the
15 min
20 min printer cannot locate an assigned file server
25 min
30 MIN during the selected time, the Novell Print
never
Server emulation is disabled. When the file
servers are active on the network again, enable
the Novell Print Server interface using
XANTÉ Command Center or the printer’s
front panel. The options are NEVER and 5
minute increments to a maximum of 30
minutes. The factory default is 30 MIN.
◊◊◊

Chapter 6 - PPD Settings
Chapter Overview
Introduction ..................................................................................... 6-3
About the PPD ................................................................................ 6-3
Selecting PPD Options .................................................................... 6-3
In a Macintosh Environment .................................................... 6-4
In a Windows 95 Environment ................................................. 6-6
In a Windows 3.1 Environment ................................................ 6-8
The PPD Menus .............................................................................. 6-9
Duplex .................................................................................... 6-10
Enhanced Screens ................................................................... 6-10
Fast Imaging ........................................................................... 6-11
Gamma ................................................................................... 6-11
Horizontal and Vertical Image Shift ....................................... 6-12
Mirror Print ............................................................................. 6-12
Negative Print ......................................................................... 6-13
Resolution ............................................................................... 6-14
Save Spooled Job .................................................................... 6-15
Smooth Shading ..................................................................... 6-15
Tray Switch............................................................................. 6-16
________________________________________ PPD Settings 6-1

Notes
6-2 PPD Settingsbb _______________________________________

Introduction
This chapter describes the options that can be selected through your
printer’s PPD (PostScript Printer Description) file.
About the PPD

The PPD allows you to select the settings for some printer features
from your application’s Print dialog box. These settings override the
printer’s front panel menu settings (see chapter 5, “Configuration”)
For these options to be available, the Adobe PostScript printer driver

and your printer’s PPD must be installed and configured properly.
See chapter 3 (Macintosh) or chapter 4 (PC).
Selecting PPD Options

In most applications, printer specific options in the PPD are accessed
through the Device Options tab in Windows 95, the Features tab in
Windows 3.1, and through the Printer Specific Options menu on a
Macintosh.
See appendix B, “Application Notes and Page Design,” for

information about specific applications
________________________________________ PPD Settings 6-3

In a Macintosh Environment
To configure a printer feature from the Print dialog box
1. Select the AdobePS icon from the Chooser and configure your
printer’s options in the PPD following the instructions in
chapter 3.
2. Select Print from the application’s File menu. The Print dialog
box appears.
3. Make sure your printer is selected in the Printer drop down menu;
then, click General to display the list of options (fig. 6.1).
Fig. 6.1 The Adobe Options Menu in the Print Dialog Box
6-4 PPD Settingsbb _______________________________________

4. Select Printer Specific Options to bring up the printer option
menus (fig. 6.2).
Fig. 6.2 The Printer Specific Options Menu
5. Use the scroll bar on the right to locate the option; then, use
the drop down menu next to the option to select the setting.
Repeat to configure other printer options.
6. Click Save Settings to save the Print dialog box settings as the
defaults for all jobs sent to the selected printer.
7. Click Print. After the file goes to the printer, the Print dialog
box closes and the application screen reappears.
________________________________________ PPD Settings 6-5

In a Windows 95 Environment
To select a PPD option from the Print dialog box
1. Select Print from your application’s File menu. The Print

dialog box appears.
Fig. 6.3 The Windows 95 Print Dialog Box
2. Make sure your printer is selected in the Name box at the top
of the Print dialog box; then click Properties.
3. Select the Graphics tab to set the Resolution option; select the
Device Options tab for all other options. Make sure that your
printer’s installable options are configured following the
instructions in chapter 4.
4. Use the scroll bar on the right to locate the feature in the
Printer feature box. Highlight the feature to display the setting
options in the Change Setting for box (fig. 6.4).
6-6 PPD Settingsbb _______________________________________

Fig. 6.4 The Windows 95 Device Options Tab
5. Select the setting from the drop down menu in the Change
Setting for box. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to configure other printer
features.
6. Click OK to close the Properties window. The Print dialog box

reappears.
7. Click OK to print. The Print dialog box closes and the

application screen reappears.
________________________________________ PPD Settings 6-7

In a Windows 3.1 Environment
To select a PPD option from the Print dialog box
1. Select Print from your application’s File menu; then, click

Setup to bring up the Print Setup dialog box.
Fig. 6.5 The Windows 3.1 Print Dialog Box
2. If your printer is not the default printer, select it from the

Specific Printer drop down menu; then, click Options.
3. Select the Features tab, if necessary.
Fig 6.6 The Windows 3.1 Features Tab
6-8 PPD Settingsbb _______________________________________

4. Use the scroll bar on the left to select printer features and the
scroll bars on the right of each feature to display and select the
options. Make sure that your printer’s installable options are
configured following the instructions in chapter 4.
5. Click OK to close the Options window and return to the Print

dialog box.
6. Click OK to print. After the file goes to the printer, the Print
dialog box closes and the application screen reappears.
The PPD Menus

Many printer features can be configured from the Print dialog box in
your application. These settings override the printer’s default
settings. This allows you to customize printer features for each job
without resetting the printer’s front panel menus.
The Auto Setup feature of the Chooser on a Macintosh sets the

defaults for the PPD menus and the printer’s installable options to
reflect the settings on the printer front panel (see “Configuring the
PPD” in chapter 3 for details). The defaults for the PPD menus and
the printer’s installable options on a PC must be set manually (see
“Configuring the PPD for Windows 3.1 and 3.11” and “Configuring
the PPD for Windows 95” in chapter 4).
The following chart lists the features that can be configured for each
print job from the PPD.
Duplex Negative Print
Enhanced Screens Resolution
Fast Imaging Save Spooled Job
Gamma Smooth Shading
Horizontal and Vertical Image Shift Tray Switch
Mirror Print
________________________________________ PPD Settings 6-9

Duplex
The Duplex menu (XTDuplex on the Windows 3.1/3.11 Features
tab) allows you to select the settings for the optional duplexer. The
options are Simplex (print without using the duplexer), Edge-duplex
(print double-sided, book style), and Tumble-duplex (print double-
sided, flip chart style)
The duplexer must be installed on the printer and configured

properly in the PPD before the options appear in the Print dialog box.
See chapter 9 to install the duplexer, chapter 7 to use the duplexer,
and chapter 3 (Macintosh) or chapter 4 (PC) to set up the PPD for the
duplexer. See appendix B, “Application Notes and Page Design” for
information about setting the Duplex configuration in PageMaker.
Note: The Duplex feature requires a minimum of 12 MB of RAM

at 600 dpi and 40 MB at 1200 dpi for letter size duplexing
(see “Printer Memory Requirements” in chapter 9).
Enhanced Screens
The Enhanced Screens (XTScreen on the Windows 3.1/3.11 Features
tab) menu allows you to use XANTÉ’s Enhanced Screening
Technology to increase the number of gray levels for a line screen
setting. The options are Normal Screen (which uses the line screen
set in your application), 145 Gray Levels, 197 Gray Levels, and 256
Gray Levels. See “Enhanced Screening” in chapter 8 for details.
6-10 PPD Settingsbb _______________________________________

Fast Imaging
The Fast Imaging menu allows you to select from two methods of
image data compression for faster printing when image quality is not
the primary concern. The options are None, which prints at normal
speed and with no data compression; Optimized for Quality, which
compresses image data for faster printing than normal but with some
(usually not noticeable) loss of image quality; and Optimized for
Speed, which implements a greater degree of data compression to
provide the fastest print time but with the possibility of a noticeable
loss of data quality.
Note: The Optimize selections do not function if the print job

contains an image that is masked or rotated to anything other
than 0°, 90°, 180°, or 270°.
Gamma
The Gamma menu allows you to choose one of seven gamma
correction curves supplied by XANTÉ or a custom curve created
with XANTÉ’s Linearizer. These curves adjust the grayscale values
for rendering the image.
Options are Gamma 0 through 6, and Custom Gamma 0 through 6.

Gamma curves 1 through 5 progressively lighten the midrange
grayscale values in an image. Gamma 0 makes no change to the image
and Gamma 6 produces a reverse (negative) image. Custom Gamma 0
through 6 use curves that you create and download to the printer.
See “Gamma Corrections” in chapter 8, “The Gamma Menu” in

chapter 5, and “Calibration with a Densitometer” in chapter 3
(Macintosh) or chapter 4 (PC).
________________________________________ PPD Settings 6-11

Horizontal and Vertical Image Shift
The Horizontal and Vertical Image Shift menus allow you to adjust
the horizontal and vertical placement of an image on the media in
1/4" (6 mm) increments up to 3 in (76 mm). With these features, you
can ensure that an image is placed correctly to be printed on a press.
Note: To use the Horizontal and Vertical Image Shift features, the
printer must have adequate RAM installed to allow full
image buffering (tabloid size output requires a minimum of
12 MB at 600 dpi and 40 MB at 1200 dpi). See “Printer
Memory Requirements” in chapter 9.
Mirror Print
The Mirror Print menu allows you to produce a mirror image which
is reversed left to right, which is used to produce right reading
emulsion side down documents required for imaging silk screens or
metal plates. The options are True to enable the feature and False to
disable it. To ensure the highest quality when producing mirror
images, use this menu in the Print dialog box rather than an
application setting.
Fig. 6.7 A Mirror Image
6-12 PPD Settingsbb _______________________________________

Negative Print
The Negative Print menu allows you to print a negative image where
black and white are reversed, which is used in offset printing. The
options are True to enable the feature and False to disable it. To
ensure the highest quality when producing negative images, use this
menu in the Print dialog box rather than an application setting.
Note: To use the Negative Print feature, the printer must have
adequate RAM installed to allow full image buffering
(tabloid size output requires a minimum of 12 MB at 600 dpi
and 40 MB at 1200 dpi). See “Printer Memory
Requirements” in chapter 9.
Fig. 6.8 A Negative Print
________________________________________ PPD Settings 6-13

Resolution
The Resolution menu allows you to select the printing resolution for
a specific job. If you have a resolution upgrade installed on your
printer, the options are 600 x 600 dpi and 1200 x 1200 dpi.
If you have installed the resolution upgrade and the required RAM,
but the upgrade cannot be selected (it is grayed out), the RAM may
not be configured properly in the PPD. The following procedures
describe how to configure the RAM in common environments.
Macintosh: Go to the Chooser, select the AdobePS icon and

your printer; then select Setup. Make sure the correct
PPD is selected; then select Configure. Make sure
the correct amount of RAM is selected in the
InstalledMemory dialog box.
Windows 95: From the Windows 95 desktop, click Start, then

Settings, and then Printers. Select your printer; click
the right mouse button; then click Properties from
the drop down menu. Select the Device Options tab
and make sure that the VMOption under Installable
options is set for the amount of installed RAM.
Select the Graphics tab and set the resolution.
Windows 3.1: Select Printers from the Control Panel. Select your
printer; then click Setup. Select the Features tab and
set InstalledMemory to match the amount of
installed RAM.
See appendix B, “Application Notes and Page Design” for

information about setting the RAM configuration in PageMaker.
6-14 PPD Settingsbb _______________________________________

Save Spooled Job
The Save Spooled Job menu allows you to retain print jobs in the
spooler’s queue. These jobs can be reprinted from the queue,
eliminating the time required to process the file and send it to the
printer. The options are True to enable the feature and False to disable it.
The printer port you are using must be set up for spooling, the
spooler option must be configured in the PPD, and the printer must
have a hard disk attached before you can use the Save Spooled Job
option. See chapter 3 (Macintosh) or chapter 4 (PC) for details on
configuring the PPD and using the spooling Feature. See chapter 5
for details on configuring the front panel Spool menus.
See appendix B, “Application Notes and Page Design” for

information about setting the spooler configuration in PageMaker.
Smooth Shading
The Smooth Shading menu allows you to implement the Adobe
PostScript 3 method of rendering gradient blends which produces the
highest quality image of which the printer is capable at the selected
resolution. For some images, the PostScript files created with
Smooth Shading are smaller and print faster than those created using
PostScript Level 2. The Smooth Shading menu is set to OFF as the
default. The options of Maximum, High, Medium, Low control the
degree to which Smooth Shading is implemented.
________________________________________ PPD Settings 6-15

Tray Switch
The Tray Switch menu in Windows 3.1/3.11, Windows 95, and some
Macintosh applications allows you to specify whether to use the
printer’s tray chaining feature. The True option enables tray chaining
to all cassettes and the manual feed tray that are loaded with the
same size paper. The False option disables tray chaining.
Most Macintosh applications allow you to configure the printer’s

tray chaining feature one of two ways:
• Use the Paper Source options on the General menu to
specify the media tray. The All pages from options allow
you to choose a specific tray or use the printer’s default to
print all pages of a job. The First page from and
Remaining from options allow you to specify one tray for
the first page and a different tray for the rest of the print
job.
• Use the Error Handling menu in the Print dialog box to
specify tray chaining. Select Use printer’s default to use
the setting configured in the Tray Switch menu on the
printer’s front panel; or select Switch to another cassette
with the same paper size to implement tray chaining when
the Tray Switch menu on the printer’s front panel is
disabled.
See “Tray Chaining” in chapter 7 for details.
◊◊◊
6-16 PPD Settingsbb _______________________________________

Chapter 7 - Using Media and Toner
Chapter Overview
Introduction ..................................................................................... 7-3
Media Specifications ....................................................................... 7-3
Selecting Media ........................................................................ 7-3
Storing Media ........................................................................... 7-4
Media Sizes ..................................................................................... 7-5
Standard Media Sizes ............................................................... 7-6
XANTÉ Myriad Film Sizes ...................................................... 7-7
Feeding Media to the Printer ........................................................... 7-8
Determining the Leading Edge ................................................. 7-8
The Paper Cassettes .................................................................. 7-8
The Manual Feed Tray ............................................................. 7-9
Tray Chaining ......................................................................... 7-10
Using Special Media ..................................................................... 7-10
Printing Computer-to-Film ..................................................... 7-10
Printing Transparencies .......................................................... 7-11
Printing Envelopes .................................................................. 7-12
Printing Labels ....................................................................... 7-12
Printing on Custom Sized Media ............................................ 7-13
Printing Double-Sided Copy ......................................................... 7-14
Manual Double-Sided Copy ................................................... 7-14
Duplexing ............................................................................... 7-15
Handling the Toner Cartridge........................................................ 7-17
Adjusting Toner Output .......................................................... 7-18
________________________________ Using Media and Toner 7-1

Notes
7-2 Using Media and Tonerb ________________________________

Introduction
This chapter describes how to select and use various media types and
sizes, how to create double-sided output, and how to handle the toner
cartridge.
Media Specifications
In addition to printer capabilities and application features, the quality
of printed output depends on the type and condition of the media
used. To ensure that your job prints correctly, always select media
that is appropriate for the print job and the printer. Storing and
handling the media carefully prevents damage to both the media and
the printer.
Selecting Media
Use the guidelines in this section when selecting media to use with
your XANTÉ printer. To save on media costs, test a sample of new
media before buying in quantity and run a sample on plain paper to
check layout before using more expensive stock.
Caution: All media used in the printer should be able to withstand

a temperature of 374˚ F (190˚ C). Inks on preprinted
sheets such as letterhead that cannot withstand these
temperatures can cause permanent damage to the
printer’s fusing rollers.
Standard 20 lb bond copier paper works well for most printing jobs.
Use 24 lb bond/60 lb text weight paper to ensure more consistent
coverage when higher quality is desired.

You can create computer-to-film output using XANTÉ’s Myriad
film. When processed through XANTÉ’s FilmStar 2, the resulting
professional quality film image can be used to burn metal plates and
silk screen emulsions, bypassing the expensive camera and darkroom
steps required in conventional printing. Use only XANTÉ’s Myriad
film. It is designed specifically for use with your printer and
FilmStar 2. Using other film material may void your printer
warranty.
Avoid media which

• Is too thick, thin, rough, coated, synthetically reinforced, or
extremely textured (such as course or embossed stock)
• Has been or is wet, damp, curled, torn, creased, or otherwise
damaged
• Has metal clasps, strings, staples, cutouts perforations, windows,
or exposed adhesives
• Is a partial sheet of labels or a sheet on which the glue has
soaked through the labels.
Caution: Using media that does not meet these guidelines may
void your printer warranty. XANTÉ is not responsible
for damages caused by media. Repair will be at the
user’s expense.
Storing Media
Improper storage practices can damage media, which can cause
printer jams and reduced print quality. To avoid problems, always
store media flat (not on its side or end), in its own wrapper, in small
not too heavy stacks, and in a dark, dry, cool area.

Media Sizes
Your XANTÉ printer allows you to use standard and custom media
sizes. The following chart provides an overview of the media sizes
and types that you can feed using your printer’s paper cassettes and
the manual feed tray.
Media Guidelines
Media Size Weight Feed Capacity*
Source (approximate)
Paper Letter: 8.50" x 11.00" 17 to 24 lb Paper 250 to 750**
(216 mm x 279 mm) (64 to 90 g/m2) Cassette
Legal: 8.50" x 14.00"
(216 mm x 356 mm)
Ledger: 11.00" x 17.00"
(279 mm x 432 mm)
A4: 8.26" x 11.69"
(210 mm x 297 mm)
A3: 11.69" x 16.54"
(297 mm x 420 mm)
Paper 3.90" x 5.80" 17 to 24 lb Manual 100

(99 mm x 147 mm) (64 to 90 g/m2) Feed
up to Tray
Transparency 12.00" x 25.00" 17 to 34 lb 50
(305 mm x 635 mm) (64 to 128 g/m2)
Labels 40
Myriad Film See Myriad Film Sizes 3 mil 25
* Paper capacity is based on 20 lb (80 g/m2) stock
** 750 sheet capacity requires two optional paper cassettes
Fig. 7.1 Media Guidelines

Standard Media Sizes
The physical page size is different from the imageable area. The
portion of a physical page on which the printer can lay down toner is
the imageable area. The following chart gives the Accel-a-Writer
8300 imageable areas for many standard media sizes.
Media Imageable
Size Areas
Letter 8.50" x 11.00" 8.32" x 10.88"

(216 mm x 279 mm) (211 mm x 276 mm)
Legal 8.50" x 14.00" 8.37" x 13.84"

(216 mm x 356 mm) (213 mm x 352 mm)
A4 8.26" x 11.69" 8.08" x 11.52"

(210 mm x 297 mm) (205 mm x 293 mm)
A3 11.69" x 16.54" 11.57" x 16.37"

(297 mm x 420 mm) (294 mm x 416 mm)
B5 7.17" x 10.13" 6.99" x 10.03"

(182 mm x 257 mm) (178 mm x 255 mm)
B4 10.13" x 14.34" 9.92" x 14.19"

(257 mm x 364 mm) (252 mm x 360 mm)
Ledger 11.00" x 17.00" 10.88" x 16.80"

(11 x 17) (279 mm x 432 mm) (276 mm x 427 mm)
Executive 7.25" x 10.50" 7.07" x 10.40"

(185 mm x 267 mm) (180 mm x 264 mm)
Com 10 4.13" x 9.50" 4.05" x 9.33"

(105 mm x 241 mm) (103 mm x 237 mm)
Monarch 3.88" x 7.50" 3.73" x 7.36"

(99 mm x 191 mm) (95 mm x 187 mm)
DL 4.33" x 8.67" 4.21" x 8.47"

(110 mm x 220 mm) (107 mm x 215 mm)
C5 6.38" x 9.01" 6.24" x 8.88"

(162 mm x 229 mm) (158 mm x 226 mm)

If the extra wide print option is installed, the imageable area for
12.00" (305 mm) wide media is increased.
Standard Extra Wide

Media Size Imageable Area Imageable Area
12.00" x 19.00" 11.63" x 18.87" 11.95" x 18.87"
(305 mm x 483 mm) (295 mm x 479 mm) (304 mm x 479 mm)
12.00" x 25.00" 11.63" x 24.87" 11.95" x 24.87"

(305 mm x 635 mm) (295 mm x 632 mm) (304 mm x 632 mm)
Set the page margins in your applications to fit within the imageable
areas. If you try to print outside the imageable area, many applications
issue a warning message, giving you an opportunity to make changes;
some applications, however, clip the image and print the page.
XANTÉ Myriad Film Sizes

The following chart lists Myriad film sizes. To order Myriad film,
call XANTÉ Customer Support at 800-926-8393 from the US and
Canada or at 334-342-4846 from other locations.
Myriad Film Myriad Film
Part Number Size
200-100001 8.50" x 11.00"
(216 mm x 279 mm)
200-100002 8.26" x 11.69"
(210 mm x 297 mm)
200-100003 11.00" x 17.00"
(279 mm x 432 mm)
200-100004 11.69" x 16.54"
(297 mm x 420 mm)
200-100005 10.00" x 15.00"
(254 mm x 381 mm)
200-100006 11.70" x 18.00"
(297 mm x 457 mm)
200-100007 12.00" x 18.00"
(305 mm x 457 mm)
200-100008 12.00" x 25.00"
(305 mm x 635 mm)

Feeding Media to the Printer
Use the paper cassettes to feed standard size paper. Use the manual
feed tray for non-standard or oversized media, film, transparencies,
envelopes, labels, or when printing limited quantities.
Determining the Leading Edge

The leading edge of the media is determined by the media size and
the feeding source. Use the following chart to determine the leading
edge.
Domestic International Manual

Media Size Cassette Cassette Feed Tray
A3 — Short Short
A4 — Long Long
B4 — Short Short
B5 — Long Long
Letter Long — Long
Legal Short — Short
Ledger Short — Short
Executive Long
P15 — Short
P18 — Short
12" x 19" — Short
12" x 25" — Short
Envelope — Short
* Short = Short Edge First, Long = Long Edge First
The Paper Cassettes

One 250 sheet paper cassette ships with your printer. The North
American paper cassette is set up to feed letter, legal, 11" x 17", and
executive paper sizes. The international paper cassette is set up to
feed A4, A3, A5, B5, and B4 paper sizes.

You can install up to two additional paper feeders, each of which
can hold a 250 sheet cassette. With three paper cassettes and the
manual feed tray, your printer’s capacity is expanded to 850 sheets.
The paper cassettes and manual feed tray can be used to increase the
capacity for a single media size with the tray chaining option or as
sources for different sizes or types of print media. For example, to
use both letter and ledger size media, load up to 250 sheets of one
size in the standard cassette and 250 sheets of the other size in the
optional cassette.
Select the appropriate paper cassette as the media source using the
front panel Tray Select key, or select tray chaining using the front
panel Tray Switch menu (see chapter 5 for information about front
panel configuration and chapter 2 for information about installing
and loading the paper cassettes and optional paper feeder).
The Manual Feed Tray

Your printer’s built-in manual feed tray is designed to feed up to 100
sheets of standard letter/A4, B5, legal/special A4, ledger/A3,
oversized paper, up to 25 sheets of Myriad Film, up to 50
transparencies, or up to 40 label sheets. Custom size media,
including envelopes, that measure from 3.90" x 5.80" (99 mm x 147
mm) up to 12.00" x 25.00" (305 mm x 635 mm) can be fed from the
manual feed tray. Use the printer’s tray extender to support the larger
media.
Select the manual feed tray as the media source using the Tray Select
key on the printer’s front panel or through the print dialog box in
your application. If the manual feed tray is loaded with the same size
media as the paper cassettes, it can be used as a media source for tray
chaining (see chapter 5 for information about front panel
configuration and chapter 2 for information about loading the manual
feed tray).

Tray Chaining
Tray chaining directs the printer to automatically switch to another
source for media when the current source is empty. With the Accel-
a-Writer 8300, you can chain to all paper cassettes and the manual
feed tray.
To enable the tray chaining feature

• All selected media sources must contain the same size media. If
the printer detects a different size media when it switches to a
new tray, a PAPER OUT message appears.
• All trays must be properly inserted. When tray chaining is
enabled, an incorrectly positioned tray will prevent the printer
from printing.
• Select the tray chaining feature from your application’s Print
dialog box (see chapter 6, “PPD Settings”).
• To change the printer’s default tray chaining option, use the front
panel Tray Switch menu (see chapter 5, “Configuration”).
Using Special Media

Be sure that all media used in your XANTÉ printer meets the guidelines
listed in “Media Specifications” earlier in the chapter. When printing to
special media, such as Myriad film, envelopes, or custom sized media,
always use the manual feed tray. See “The Manual Feed Tray” earlier in
this chapter and in chapter 2 for details.
Printing Computer-to-Film
You can print directly to XANTÉ’s Myriad Film, a specially designed,
semitransparent film with low UV blockage. When processed through
FilmStar 2, which increases the transmissive density of the toner on the
film to 3.3, the image on Myriad film can be used to burn metal plates
and silk-screen emulsions, bypassing the camera and darkroom steps.

Always use the manual feed tray and keep the following pointers in
mind when printing on film.
• Use only XANTÉ’s Myriad film. It is designed specifically for
use with your printer and FilmStar 2. Using other film material
may void your printer warranty.
• Limit film handling to prevent fingerprints and scratches.
• Keep the paper path clean (see chapter 9 for cleaning details). Dust
and dirt can scratch film or reduce print quality.
• Load fewer sheets of film if jams occur.
• Remove film as it is printed to help prevent static build-up.
• Do not fan direct film materials. This causes static
build-up which can cause jams.
• Select a gamma correction curve from the Gamma menu on your
printer’s front panel or your application’s print dialog box to
adjust output.
• Once an image is printed on Myriad Film, the side with toner is
the emulsion side for FilmStar 2 processing. The film is loaded
into FilmStar 2 with the emulsion side up.
Printing Transparencies
Always use the manual feed tray and keep the following pointers in
mind when printing on transparencies.
• Avoid handling transparencies to prevent fingerprints and scratches.
• Keep the paper path clean (see chapter 9 for cleaning details). Dust
or dirt can scratch transparencies and reduce the print quality.
• Load 50 sheets or less, making sure the stack does not exceed the
upper paper limit tabs on the side guides of the manual feed tray.
• Load fewer transparencies if jams occur. The weight of a stack
of transparencies could cause the sheets to stick together.
• Remove each transparency as it prints to help prevent static
build-up.

• Do not fan transparencies. This causes static build-up which can
cause jams.
• Select a gamma correction curve from the Gamma menu on your
printer’s front panel or your application’s print dialog box to
adjust output.
Printing Envelopes
Although your printer is not designed to run large numbers of
envelopes, you can print them individually.
Always use the manual feed tray and keep the following in mind
when printing envelopes.
• Before loading the envelope, place it on a flat surface and press it
smooth to make the corners and folds as flat as possible.
• Run the envelope with the flap closed, and then open it as soon
as it emerges from the printer. This prevents the heat during
printing from sealing the envelope.
• Format envelopes in your application and run a test print on
plain paper to check alignment of the flap before running on the
more expensive envelope stock.
Printing Labels
Always use the manual feed tray and keep the following in mind
when printing labels.
• Load 40 sheets or fewer, making sure the stack does not exceed the
upper paper limit tabs on the side guides of the manual feed tray.
• Make sure the sheets do not become packed down as they are
loaded into the manual feed tray. Sheets compressed by the
weight of stack will expand as they are fed into the printer which
can cause a jam.
• Make sure labels are not curled on the corners or coming loose
from the backing sheet.

• Do not use label sheets with exposed adhesives (such as partially
used sheets or sheets on which the adhesive has seeped through
to the surface).
• Do not use thick, rough, textured, coated, synthetically
reinforced, curled, torn, or otherwise damaged label stock.
• Format your labels in your application and run a test print on
plain paper to check alignment before running on the more
expensive label stock.
Printing on Custom Sized Media

The Adobe PostScript printer drivers supplied with the XANTÉ
Utilities disks allow you to print on media from 3.90" x 5.80" (99
mm x 147 mm) up to 12.00" x 25.00" (305 mm x 635 mm). Oversize
printing allows you to print 11" x 17"/A3 (279 mm x 432 mm) full
size bleeds.
Set the custom page size through your application. Be sure that the
paper size selections in the page or document setup section agree
with those in the Print dialog box to ensure that the page prints
correctly.
If the extra wide print option is installed, the imageable area for
12.00" (305 mm) wide media is increased (see “Media Sizes” earlier
in this chapter). Be sure to set the page margins in your applications
to fit within the imageable areas.
Use only media that meets the guidelines listed in “Media

Specifications” earlier in this chapter. Always feed custom sized
media from the manual feed tray following the instructions in
“Feeding Media to the Printer” earlier in this chapter and “The
Manual Feed Tray” in chapter 2.

The following chart lists the minimum memory configuration
required to print to oversized media.
Minimum Memory Requirements
Media Size 600 dpi 1200 dpi
12.00" x 19.00" (305 mm x 483 mm) 8 MB 20 MB

12.00" x 25.00" (305 mm x 635 mm) 16 MB 32 MB
11.25" x 18.50" (286 mm x 470 mm) 8 MB 20 MB
Some complex, large files or those with heavy graphics may require
additional memory to print.
If a virtual memory error occurs, there is not enough printer memory

to process the job. To resolve the situation
• Add more memory to your printer.
• Print at a lower resolution.
• Use only printer resident fonts.
For more information on memory requirements, see “Printer

Memory Requirements” in chapter 9.
Printing Double-Sided Copy

You can print double-sided copy manually by feeding the media
through the printer twice or automatically with the optional duplexer.
Manual Double-Sided Copy

1. Print the first side using either the manual feed tray or the
paper cassette.
2. Remove the media from the output tray, straighten any curling
edges, and allow it to cool thoroughly.

3. Load the media using the following guidelines:
Note: For best results when printing on the second side of

the media, we recommend that you feed sheets
individually or slip-feed (feed a blank sheet between
each printed sheet) to prevent toner from sticking to
adjacent pages.
a. Determine the leading edge of the media (see “Feeding

Media to the Printer” earlier in this chapter).
b. Print a test page and check your software documentation

to determine the orientation of the top edge of the media.
c. Load the media into the cassette or manual feed tray

with the blank side of the sheet in the print side position
(see “Feeding Media to the Printer” earlier in this
chapter).
4. Print the second side.
Duplexing
The optional duplexer allows you to print double-sided copy
automatically, rather than by feeding pages manually.
You can use the duplexer for 64-90 g/m2 weight A3, B4, A4, B5,
letter, ledger, legal, and executive size plain paper, fed from either
the standard or the optional cassette.
Follow the guidelines in “Media Specifications” earlier in this

chapter. We recommend that you avoid using recycled paper. It
tends to absorb moisture easily which can cause the paper to wrinkle
or fold at the corners. This can cause jams.
Printer memory requirements for duplexing vary according to the

media size and print resolution selected. See “Printer Memory
Requirements” in chapter 9 for details.

See “Paper Handling Options” in chapter 2 for instructions on
installing, removing, and storing the duplexer. See Appendix A,
“Troubleshooting” for solutions to paper jam and print quality issues.
Using the Duplexer

You can select from the three duplexing options using either the
Duplex key on the printer’s front panel or the PPD option in your
application’s Print dialog box.
• Simplex is standard printing on one side of the page.
• Edge-duplex is double-sided printing in edge to edge

book style (fig. 7.2).
• Tumble-duplex is double-sided printing in a flip chart style

(fig. 7.2).
Edge Duplex Tumble Duplex

(Side-by-side) (Flip Chart)
Fig. 7.2 Edge and Tumble Duplexing.
The Duplex key allows you to scroll through the options in the
display window. The Duplex LED is lit when either Edge-duplex or
Tumble-duplex is selected.
The duplexer must be configured as an option in the PPD before you

can select it through the Print dialog box. See chapter 3, (Macintosh) or
chapter 4, (PC) for instructions on configuring the PPD. See chapter 6,
“PPD Settings,” for details about selecting PPD options.

Handling the Toner Cartridge
Your printer uses a standard toner cartridge that combines the toner
and the drum, so you only have to replace one consumable. The
toner cartridge averages 8000 letter/A4 size copies at 4% coverage.
When you handle the toner cartridge, keep the following in mind:
• Never move the printer with the toner cartridge installed.
• The toner cartridge is sensitive to bright lights and direct
sunlight. Leave it in its protective bag until you are ready to load
it into the printer.
• The cartridge contains a magnet, so keep it away from your hard
disk(s) and monitor to prevent possible data loss.
• When you store the cartridge, keep it lengthwise on a level
surface, not on end or upside-down.
• Use a cartridge before its expiration date to maintain maximum
print quality.
• Unopened cartridge packages have a shelf life of approximately
2 1/2 years of storage plus usage. An opened cartridge package
has a shelf life of approximately 6 months storage plus usage.
• We recommend you use only new toner cartridges. Refilled toner
cartridges may vary in quality and reliability, and toner leaks
could affect your printer warranty.
• Because toner settles during prolonged storage, a break in run of
up to 50 copies may be required for new toner cartridges.
• If you do not use the printer for a week or two, you may need to
run 3 or 4 copies to loosen the toner. For longer periods, you
may need to remove the cartridge and gently rock it back and
forth to redistribute the toner in the cartridge.
See “The Toner Cartridge” in chapter 2 for installation and

replacement instructions.

Adjusting Toner Output
If your printer does not produce the rich, black images that you
expect, the toner may have settled in the cartridge or you may need
to adjust the print density.
Redistributing Toner
If the toner cartridge has not been used in several days, the toner may
have settled in the cartridge. Remove the toner cartridge from the
printer, gently rock it back and forth to redistribute the toner
throughout the cartridge, and then replace it in the printer. “The
Toner Cartridge” in chapter 2 contains instructions and illustrations
for this process.
Changing the Density Menu

If redistributing the toner in the cartridge does not resolve the problem,
you can lighten or darken the amount of toner laid down by the printer
through the front panel Density menu. The options are 1 through 7.
Increasing the numeric setting increases the density of the toner applied.
See chapter 5 for instructions on using the front panel menus.
Note: Check the Density menu setting when you replace a toner
cartridge. The setting required for the previous cartridge may
be too high or low for the new cartridge. We suggest
switching back to the factory default of 5.
◊◊◊

Chapter 8- Advanced Features
Chapter Overview
Introduction ..................................................................................... 8-3
Levels of Gray ................................................................................. 8-3
Line Screens .................................................................................... 8-4
Scanner Resolutions ........................................................................ 8-4
Line Art Scanning ..................................................................... 8-4
Halftone Scanning .................................................................... 8-5
TIFF, PICT, EPS Formats ......................................................... 8-5
Gamma Corrections ........................................................................ 8-6
Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology ........................................ 8-8
Enhanced Screening ........................................................................ 8-8
RAM Enhance ................................................................................. 8-9
Font Accelerator and RAM Disk .................................................. 8-10
Accurate Calibration Technology ................................................. 8-11
____________________________________ Advanced Features 8-1

Notes
8-2 Advanced Features ____________________________________

Introduction
To take full advantage of your printer’s high resolution and make
your images look their best, it is important that you understand levels
of gray, line screens, scanner resolutions, scanned image formats,
and their uses within specific applications.
This chapter explains these concepts and describes how to use them
with XANTÉ’s Enhanced Screening Technology, NEIT, XANTÉ’s
Halftone Calibration Technology, to achieve the best quality in
output.
Levels of Gray
A laser printer’s resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi). The
standard resolution on your printer is 600 x 600 dpi, which you may
have upgraded to 1200 x 1200 dpi.
The human eye can detect approximately 256 shades of gray. The
more levels of gray (number of shades) produced in a halftone
image, the smoother the image appears.
The following simple formula can help you determine the shades of
gray used to produce an image:
( dots per inch
lines per inch

) 2
+1
For example, if you print at 600 x 600 dpi with a 60 line screen, the
image produced has 101 levels of gray (600/60 = 10; 10 x 10 + 1 =
101). For more levels of gray at 600 dpi, the line screen or lines per
inch (lpi) has to be reduced.
The higher the lines per inch, the tighter the screen on the image will
be. To produce higher levels of gray without using a lower line
screen, you must print at a higher dpi.

Use the following table as a guide to produce 256 levels of gray.
LPI To Achieve 256 Levels of Gray

Printer
Resolution LPI
1200 x 1200 dpi 75

600 x 600 dpi 38
Line Screens
The number of levels of gray you would like to achieve is one factor
in determining the appropriate line screen to use. You do not always
have to achieve 256 levels of gray for the best output. Some
experimentation usually is necessary to produce the best possible
output.
We found that line screens (lpi) of 85 for 600 dpi and 85 - 106 for
1200 dpi work well for most images. Try these line screen settings or
choose the number of gray levels to produce using XANTÉ’s
Enhanced Screening Technology (see “Enhanced Screening” later in
this chapter).
Scanner Resolutions
Another way to insure high quality output for your images is to
determine the optimum scanning resolution.
Line Art Scanning

For line art, the optimum scanning resolution would be at the same
resolution as the output device, especially when reproduced at the
same size. For example, when printing from your printer in the 600
dpi mode, the scanner resolution should be set at 600 dpi.

Halftone Scanning
The halftone scanning resolution is usually lower than that of the
output resolution. Black and white images generally should be
scanned at a resolution of 2 times that of the line screen used, if
printing at 100% size. Use the following formula to determine the
optimum resolution.
desired lpi x 2 x % of original size
For example, if a line screen of 95 is used, the scanner resolution

should be set to 190 dpi (95 x 2). If that resolution cannot be
selected, choose the next higher resolution available. If the previous
example were to be printed at 75% of original size, then the scanner
resolution should be set to 142 dpi (95 x 2 x .75).
Scanning the image at a lower than optimum resolution results in less

detail. Scanning at a higher resolution increases the file size and the
processing time, and it may only slightly increase the amount of
detail.
TIFF, PICT, EPS Formats

After creating or scanning the image, you need to decide the format
in which to save it. The three most common formats are TIFF
(Tagged Image File Format), PICT (from Picture), and EPS
(Encapsulated PostScript) files. If you use a scanning application
such as Photoshop, make sure to choose the appropriate line screen
under Page Setup before saving the image. This is essential for
importing the image into other applications. Some programs do not
allow you to change the line screen of an individual PICT or EPS
image once it is imported.
PageMaker only allows you to change the line screen of a TIFF file by
clicking the image and choosing Image Control under the Elements
menu. For version specific information, see your PageMaker
documentation.

QuarkXPress only allows you to change the line screen of an
individual TIFF file through the Style menu. For version specific
information, see the QuarkXPress documentation.
For additional application information, see appendix B, “Application

Notes and Page Design.”
Gamma Corrections
XANTÉ Halftone Calibration Technology includes a sophisticated
gamma corrections feature. This feature allows you to adjust printer
output for ink, media, file, and environmental conditions. For example,
if a scanned image is too dark, you can select a new gamma setting to
lighten and enhance the details. Gamma corrections bring out details
that can be lost when printing at higher line screens or when dark photos
are scanned.
Your printer offers seven standard gamma correction curves, 0 (no

change) through 6 with 3 as the default. Settings 0 through 5
progressively lighten the midrange values. Gamma 6 allows you to
create a negative (reverse) image, (required by some printing
processes) without using a software application. Figure 8.1 illustrates
the effects of the standard gamma correction settings.
You also can create and download up to seven custom gamma curves
to calibrate your printer for specific conditions. Custom Gamma
Curve 0 can be selected as the printer’s default gamma correction
curve using the Linear option of the front panel Gamma menu. See
“The Gamma Menu” in chapter 5, “Gamma” in chapter 6, and
“Calibration with a Densitometer” in chapter 3 (Macintosh) or
chapter 4 (PC).
All fourteen gamma correction curves can be selected on a per job

basis through the printer features section of the PPD. The PPD
setting overrides the front panel setting for the specific job.
If you use gamma corrections in combination with XANTÉ’s new

enhanced screening technology, you can further fine tune your
output quality. See “Levels of Gray” earlier in this chapter and
“Enhanced Screening,” later in this chapter.
1
White
Gamma 0
Output Levels
Black
0 1
Black Input Levels White
1 1
Gamma 1 Gamma 2
White
White
Output Levels
Output Levels
Black
Black
0 Input Levels 1 0 Input Levels 1

Black White Black White
1 1
Gamma 3 Gamma 4
White
White
Output Levels
Output Levels
Black
Black

1 1
Gamma 5 Gamma 6
White
White
Output Levels
Output Levels
Black
Black

Fig. 8.1 Gamma Corrections 0 through 6

Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology
Traditionally laser printers were designed to print positive images.
XANTÉ’s innovative, patent pending Negative Enhanced Imaging
Technology (NEIT) is the first technology to address the problems
typically associated with producing negative images on a laser printer.
The patent pending technology can be purchased as an option for your
printer.
Previously, when a negative print was done on a laser printer, gray

scales were distorted and small spaces in text and lines were
obscured by toner bleed. NEIT addresses these problems, allowing
you to adjust the application of toner when producing a negative
image to produce crisp, clean lines and text. The image on the right
in figure 8.2 illustrates how NEIT can improve a negative print.
Fig. 8.2 The NEIT Difference
XANTÉ’s optional NEIT feature is controlled through the

MISCELLANEOUS:NEIT menu on the printer’s front panel. NEIT
menu settings are activated only when you select True in the
Negative Print option of the PPD. The options are 0 to 20; increasing
the number decreases the amount of plugging (filling in) of tiny
white spaces in text and hairlines on negative images. See “The
NEIT Menu” in chapter 5 and “Negative Print” in chapter 6.
Note: NEIT requires full frame buffering. See “Printer Memory

Requirements” in chapter 9.

Enhanced Screening
XANTÉ’s Enhanced Screening Technology increases the number of
gray levels available for a line screen setting. The option can be set
from the printer’s front panel or through the PPD.
If you use the PPD, you can select the levels of gray and gamma
settings simultaneously. Gray level and line screen combinations of
enhanced screens are defined as:
Levels Line Screens

of Gray 600 dpi 1200 dpi
145 70 140
197 60 120
256 53 106
Font Accelerator and RAM Disk

Font Accelerator uses a percentage of available RAM disk to store
fonts for quick system access. Font Accelerator automatically loads
the most recently used fonts from the printer’s optional hard disk into
the RAM disk. This eliminates time usually required to access fonts
from the hard disk.
The feature can be enabled only on systems with 12 MB or more of

RAM, an optional hard disk, and with RAM disk set to at least 1
MB. See the “Font Accelerator Menu” and “The RAM Disk Menu”
in chapter 5. The printer must be restarted before Font Accelerator
becomes active.
Once Font Accelerator is active, it automatically updates the RAM

disk at runtime with the most recently used fonts. This update occurs
when the printer is in a READY/IDLE state. The front panel window
displays READY/FONT ACCEL during the update.

The maximum amount of RAM disk available is equal to the total
RAM installed minus the amount of RAM required for standard
printer operation (a minimum of 8 MB). For example, a printer with
64 MB of RAM has 56 MB (64 - 8 = 56) available. RAM disk can be
enabled in 1 MB increments up to the maximum available amount. The
printer's default is 0, which disables RAM disk.
Note: When RAM disk is set high, the initialization process can be
extended at start-up.

X•ACT (XANTÉ’s patent pending Accurate Calibration Technology)
allows you to calibrate the printer to print more precise horizontal and
vertical lines.
Because of manufacturing variations and usage, a printer may not

print lines with the exact dimensions specified by the application.
X•ACT allows you to calibrate your printer to compensates for these
differences.
Your printer is calibrated before it is shipped, but it may drift out of

alignment over time. After using X•ACT to calibrate the line lengths,
adjust the alignment of the imageable area on the page using
Command Center. See “Procedures” in chapter 3 (Macintosh) or
chapter 4 (PC) for details on using X•ACT and your printer’s margin
alignment functions.
◊◊◊

Chapter 9 - Maintenance and
Specifications
Chapter Overview
Introduction ..................................................................................... 9-3
Maintenance .................................................................................... 9-3
Handling the Printer ................................................................. 9-3
Moving the Printer .................................................................... 9-4
Cleaning the Printer .................................................................. 9-5
Technical Specifications.................................................................. 9-7
Printer Memory Requirements ................................................. 9-9
Warranty and Service Options ...................................................... 9-10
Limited Warranty .......................................................................... 9-11
_________________________ Maintenance and Specifications 9-1

Notes
9-2 Maintenance and Specificationsbb ________________________

Introduction
Your Accel-a-Writer 8300 is designed for minimal maintenance.
This chapter describes how to care for your printer and contains the
technical specifications and warranty for your printer.
Maintenance
Your printer requires minimal maintenance. Handling the printer
with care and regular cleaning should ensure that it remains in good
working order.
Handling the Printer

Always treat your printer with care. Proper care can extend the life
of the printer. When you are handling your printer, keep the
following things in mind:
• Do not place anything on top of the printer.
• Always have someone help you lift the printer. It weighs
approximately 44 lbs (19.98 kg).
• Always lift the printer by the bottom—never by the cartridge
slot or manual feed tray.
• Only use media which meets all the printer’s requirements. See
“Media Specifications” in chapter 7 for details.
• Make sure the printer’s location meets the requirements listed in
“Printer Location” in chapter 2.
• Protect the printer from strong vibrations or jostling.
• Do not open the front cover while printing. This may cause a
paper jam.
• Never oil the printer.

• Make sure that air vents are not covered and that air can move
freely around them. Never insert anything into the vents.
• Make sure the output tray does not overfill. Overfilling can block
media as it comes out and cause a printer jam.
• If the printer will not be used for an extended period (over
several days), unplug the power cord from the power source,
close the manual feed tray, and cover the printer with protective
plastic or a cloth.
• Store the printer only in an area with a temperature of 32˚ to 95˚
F (0˚ to 35˚ C) and a relative humidity of 10% to 80% with no
condensation.
Moving the Printer

Use the following guidelines when moving the printer.
Remove the cartridge and place it in its original bag to protect it
from light. If you no longer have this bag, place the cartridge in a
dark bag or wrap it in a dark cloth.
• Make sure the toner cartridge stays level during the move. Then,
rock it gently to redistribute toner before placing the cartridge
back in the printer. For details, see “Handling the Toner
Cartridge” in chapter 7.
• Make sure the top cover and manual feed tray are closed.
• Remove all interface cables and the power cord.
• If a SCSI disk is attached, remove it.
• Always have help when you lift the printer. It weighs
approximately 44 lbs. (19.98 kg).

Cleaning the Printer
Your printer requires minimal cleaning. The most convenient time to
clean the printer is when you install a new toner cartridge.
To clean your printer
1. Turn off your printer and disconnect it from the power source.
2. Remove the toner cartridge. (See “The Toner Cartridge” in

chapter 2 for details.)
3. Locate the static charge eliminator and clean any paper dust or
scrap residue from it using the green cleaning brush located
inside the top cover area on the left (fig. 10.1). To do this,
gently run the brush back and forth across the eliminator
several times.
Fig. 10.1 Clean the Static Charge Area

4. Locate the transfer guide and clean off any dust and paper
residue by wiping the area with a soft, dry, lint-free, clean
cloth (fig. 10.2).
Fig. 10.2 Clean the Transfer Guide
5. Install the new toner cartridge and close the printer. (See “The
Toner Cartridge” in chapter 2 for details.)
6. Clean the printer’s exterior using a clean, lint-free cloth

dampened with water, denatured alcohol, or a mild,
water-based detergent.
Caution: Never use ammonia-based cleaners on or around

the printer. This may cause permanent damage to
the toner cartridge or to the printer’s plastic case.
Never spray or pour solutions directly on the
printer. Always put the solution on the cloth and
wipe the printer with the cloth. Make sure the
solution does not get inside the printer, ports, or
power cord areas.
7. Give the printer a few minutes for any damp areas to dry
thoroughly. Then, reconnect the printer to the power source.

Technical Specifications
Type: Laser printer; AMD 29040/33 MHz RISC
processor
Engine: Canon JX; 8 pages–per–minute (letter)
Power: Supply: 100-120 volts; 3.5 amps; 385 watts

Consumption: Max. 755 W
Noise Level: Printing: less than 49 dB

Standby: less than 37 dB
Dimensions: (W) 17.3" (440 mm)

(D) 17.9" (457 mm)
(H) 11.1" (282 mm)
(H) 14.9" (379 mm) with media feeder
Weight: 33 lbs (15 kg)
Environment: 50˚ to 90.5˚ Fahrenheit (10˚ to 32.5˚ Celsius)

and 20% to 80% relative humidity without
rapid changes; Air Pressure 760-1013 hpa
(570-760 mmHg)
Language: Adobe PostScript 3
Typefaces: 136 PostScript fonts

Types 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6 PostScript download
font support
Interfaces: Standard: LocalTalk, Centronics parallel,

RS232 serial, and SCSI disk interface
Optional: Ethernet (EtherTalk, Novell
NetWare, TCP/IP)
Resolutions: 600 x 600 dpi; (1200 x 1200 dpi upgrade)
Memory: 8 MB RAM (4, 16, and 32 MB SIMM

upgrades to 128 MB)

Media size: 3.90" x 5.80" (99 mm x 147 mm) up to 12.00"
x 25.00" (305 mm x 635 mm)
XANTÉ Features: XANTÉ Halftone Calibration Technology

XANTÉ Enhanced Screening Technology
XANTÉ Accurate Calibration Technology
(X•ACT), patent pending
XANTÉ Negative Enhanced Imaging
Technology (NEIT), patent pending
Toner cartridge: 8,000 sheets (letter; 4% coverage)

Printer Memory Requirements
Memory requirements vary depending on the print resolution, media
size, and duplexing mode. Negative image and NEIT printing require
full image buffering.
The following chart lists the minimum available memory required to

print typical configurations. Available memory is equal to the total
RAM installed minus the amount of RAM Disk enabled (see chapter
8 for details). Complex files, large files or those with heavy graphics
may require more than the standard memory to print.
Minimum Memory Requirements
Media Duplex Race Compress◊ Full Image
600 dpi 1200 dpi 600 dpi 1200 dpi 600 dpi 1200 dpi†
† †
COM10 Env. N/A N/A 8MB 20MB 8MB 20MB

C5 Env. N/A N/A 8MB 20MB 8MB 20MB
DL Env. N/A N/A 8MB 20MB 8MB 20MB
Monarch Env. N/A N/A 8MB 20MB 8MB 20MB
B5 12MB 28MB 8MB 20MB 8MB 20MB
Letter/A4 12MB 40MB 8MB 20MB 8MB 20MB
Executive 12MB 32MB 8MB 20MB 8MB 20MB
B4 16MB 52MB 8MB 20MB 12MB 28MB
Legal 16MB 48MB 8MB 20MB 12MB 28MB
11x17/Leger/A3 20MB 80MB 8MB 20MB 12MB 40MB
12" x 18" N/A N/A 8MB 20MB 16MB 40MB
12" x 19" N/A N/A 8MB 20MB 16MB 48MB
12" x 20" N/A N/A 16MB 28MB 16MB 48MB
12" x 21" N/A N/A 16MB 32MB 16MB 48MB
12" x 23" N/A N/A 16MB 32MB 16MB 52MB
12" x 25" N/A N/A 16MB 32MB 20MB 64MB
◊
If your printer has enough RAM available for full frame imaging, race
compression is not used.
†
1200 dpi is not available unless the resolution upgrade and a minimum of
20 MB of RAM is available.

Warranty and Service Options
We recommend that only XANTÉ trained service engineers perform
service on your printer. XANTÉ offers several service plans,
designed to meet your business needs. You can choose XANTÉ’s
Customer Return Service, which is an extension of the one year
limited warranty; Depot Service; Cross-Ship Service, or RightSite,
XANTÉ’s on-site service plan.
XANTÉ provides a one year limited warranty against defects in

material and workmanship on your printer (see “Limited Warranty”
later in this chapter). To obtain warranty service, call customer
support for an RGA (Return Goods Authorization) number and
return your printer to the XANTÉ Customer Repair Center, freight
prepaid. XANTÉ repairs or replaces your printer within five business
days, to locations within the United States and Canada. You may
purchase multiple year extensions to this plan.
The Depot Service plan allows you to drop off or ship your printer to
the designated Olivetti Customer Repair Center near you. Your
printer will be repaired and returned to you, freight prepaid, within
ten business days from the date of receipt.
With XANTÉ’s Cross-Ship Service, you receive a temporary

replacement printer via prepaid priority shipment. Your printer can
then be sent to XANTÉ, repaired, and returned to you, freight
prepaid. After you receive your repaired printer, you return the
replacement printer to XANTÉ.
XANTÉ’s RightSite is a comprehensive on-site service plan

provided by XANTÉ and Olivetti North America within the United
States and Canada. With this plan, if you are within 50 miles of the
nearest Olivetti Customer Repair Center, a trained service technician
is dispatched to your site by the end of the next business day to begin
servicing your printer.
To learn the details of these plans or to request service under one of

these plans, call XANTÉ Customer Support at 800-926-8839 in the
US and Canada or at 334-342-4846 elsewhere.

Limited Warranty
XANTÉ CORPORATION warrants this product against defects in material
and workmanship for a period of ONE (1) YEAR from the date of original
purchase of the Accel-a-Writer 8300 printer.
In case of defect, XANTÉ CORPORATION will, at its option, repair, or

replace this product at no charge to you provided you return the product,
freight prepaid, to us during the warranty period. Please attach your name,
address, telephone number, a description of the problem, and proof of date
of original purchase. This warranty does not apply if the product has been
damaged by accident, abuse, misuse, misapplication, or if the product has
been modified without the written permission of XANTÉ CORPORATION.
XANTÉ CORPORATION IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL,

INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING
FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY, OR UNDER ANY OTHER
LEGAL THEORY, INCLUDING LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME,
GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT
AND PROPERTY, AND ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING,
REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA
STORED IN OR USED WITH XANTÉ CORPORATION PRODUCTS.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or

consequential damages or limitations on how long an implied warranty
lasts, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This
warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights
which vary from state to state.
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES

OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO ONE (1) YEAR FROM
THE DATE OF ORIGINAL PURCHASE OF THE ACCEL-A-WRITER
8300.
THE WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU

OF ALL OTHERS, ORAL OR WRITTEN, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.

Effect of Consumables on Warranty
We recommend you use only XANTÉ parts and consumables in your
Accel-a-Writer 8300 printer. To order parts and consumables from
XANTÉ call Customer Support at 800-926-8393 in the US and
Canada or 334-342-4846 elsewhere.
Your warranty and maintenance contracts are not affected by using

non-XANTÉ products. However, any damages resulting from or
repairs required due to use of non-XANTÉ products are not covered;
if this happens, time and materials costs are charged.
◊◊◊

Appendix A
Troubleshooting
Appendix Overview
Introduction .................................................................................... A-3
Troubleshooting ............................................................................. A-3
Jams ......................................................................................... A-3
Status Messages ..................................................................... A-12
Preliminary Troubleshooting ................................................. A-14
Miscellaneous Troubleshooting ............................................. A-16
Print Quality Troubleshooting ............................................... A-19
Calling for Technical Support ...................................................... A-24
Troubleshooting Information ................................................. A-25
XANTÉ Phone Support ......................................................... A-25
XANTÉ Fax Support ............................................................. A-26
XANTÉ Bulletin Board Support ........................................... A-26
XANTÉ Internet Support ...................................................... A-26
______________________________________ Troubleshooting A-1

Notes
A-2 Troubleshootingbb ____________________________________

Introduction
This chapter provides suggestions for troubleshooting printer
hardware problems and information about XANTÉ support services.
Troubleshooting
The troubleshooting section can help you correct most printer
hardware problems. It covers printer jams, status messages, a
preliminary troubleshooting procedure, and miscellaneous and print
quality problems.
Jams
This section covers preventing and clearing media jams.
Preventing Jams
Many jams are the result of using the wrong consumables, either
toner or media, and handling the consumables incorrectly. The
following tips can help avoid these types of jams.
• Make sure all media meets the guidelines in “Media
Specifications” in chapter 7.
• Make sure media is stored following the guidelines in “Storing
Media” in chapter 7.
• Make sure the correct size media is loaded in the selected
cassette or manual feed tray.
• When printing on various media, always follow the guidelines in
the corresponding sections of chapter 7, such as in “Printing
Computer-to-Film” or “Printing on Custom Sized Media.”
• Make sure all media is in good condition—not torn, wrinkled,
curled, or damp.

• Never overfill cassettes or the manual feed tray. The cassettes
hold approximately 250 sheets of plain or laser paper. The
manual feed tray holds approximately 100 sheets of laser or 20
lb bond/60 lb text weight paper, 50 transparencies, 40 label
sheets, or 25 sheets of Myriad film. Make sure stock does not
exceed upper limit marks on the cassette or manual feed tray.
• Always load the cassette media print-side down and the manual
feed tray media print-side up.
• Make sure the output tray’s paper stop is up when you print
oversized media.
• Empty the output tray when it gets full to prevent media in the
tray from blocking media as it exits the printer.
• Use XANTÉ supplied toner.
• Use XANTÉ Myriad film.
• Do not use refilled toner cartridges.
• Handle and store toner cartridges following the guidelines in
“The Toner Cartridge” in chapter 2 and “Handling the Toner
• Keep the printer clean. See “Cleaning the Printer” in chapter 9.
Clearing Jams
Jams occur along the paper path in the areas illustrated in figure A.1
Since media jams can occur in several areas at the same time, you
need to check the full paper path.

Fig. A.1 The Printer Paper Path
To fix media jams
1. Check the paper cassette area for a jam. If found, use the
following procedure to clear the jam.
a. Remove the cassette.
b. If you find a jam, remove the media (fig. A.2) from the
cassette slot. If you use two cassettes and cannot remove
a jam from the lower cassette slot, remove it through the
upper cassette slot.
Fig. A.2 Remove Media from the Cassette Area

2. Check the manual feed tray for a jam. If found, pull the media
straight out from the tray.
Fig. A.3 Remove Media from the Manual Feed Tray Area
3. Open the back cover and check for a jam. If found, use the
following procedure to clear the jam.
a. Locate the green pressure release lever on the right and

pull it up (fig. A.4).
b. Pull the media gently out of the printer (fig. A.4).
Pressure
Release
Lever
Fig. A.4 Remove Media from the Back Cover Area

4. Check the output tray for a jam. If found, pull the media out
from the output tray (fig. A.5).
Fig. A.5 Remove Media from the Output Tray
5. Check the toner cartridge area for a jam using the following
procedure.
a. Open the top cover by pressing the release latch and

tilting the cover up and back (fig. 2.1).
b. Remove the toner cartridge by pulling it up and out (fig.

2.21).

c. Grasp the green lever on the paper access door and lift
up and back (fig. A.6).
d. Check for a jam; if found, gently pull the jammed media

out (fig. A.6).
Green Lever on Paper Access Door
Fig. A.6 Remove Media from the Toner Cartridge Area
e. Close the paper access door.
f. Align the toner cartridge on the runners inside the

printer, and slide the cartridge into the printer until it
rests securely in place (fig. 2.26).
g. Close the printer’s top cover; it will click in place.
6. Resume printing from your application.
Note: Your printer has an automatic jam recovery feature. If the

feature is enabled and a multiple page job jams, as long as
you do not turn off the printer to remove the jam, the printer
reprints the jammed page and the rest of the job. See “The
Jam Recover Menu” in chapter 5 for details.

Clearing Duplexer Jams
Jams occur in the back unit, between the back unit and printer, and in
the bottom area of the printer (fig. A.7).
Fig. A.7 The Duplexer Paper Path
To clear duplexer jams
1. Open the printer’s top cover (fig. 2.1) and remove the toner
cartridge (fig. 2.21).
Caution: If the toner cartridge does not come out easily, do

not force it. Cover the cartridge with a dark cloth
or its wrapper to protect it from light while it is out
of the printer.
2. Remove the printer’s paper cassette by pulling it straight out.
3. Check the back unit for a jam using the following procedure.
a. Open the duplexer’s top cover by lifting its release latch

and tilting the cover up and back.

b. Check for a jam; if found, gently pull the jammed media
up and out (fig. A.8). Then, close the top cover.
1
2
Fig. A.8 Remove Media from the Back Unit
4. Check the area between the back unit and printer for a jam
using the following procedure.
a. Pull out the back cover release latch and slide the back
unit open as far as it will go (fig. 2.12).
b. Look for the jam; if found, pull the jammed media

forward, up, and out (fig. A.9).
Fig. A.9 Remove Media from between the Back Unit and Printer
c. Close the duplexer by sliding it back into place, making

sure the back unit fits against the printer.
Note: Leaving a gap between the duplexer’s back unit

and the printer will cause another paper jam or
prevent the duplexer from operating properly. A
message of Cover Open or Paper Jam
appears in the window.
5. Check the bottom area of the printer for a jam using the
following procedure.
a. Pull the jam handling tray out approximately two inches

from the front of the printer. Then, lift up to remove it
(fig. A.10).
Fig. A.10 Remove the Jam Handling Tray
b. Insert your hand in the tray opening and gently pull out
any jammed media found (fig. A.11).
Fig. A.11 Remove Media from the Bottom Area of the Printer.
c. Slide the jam handling tray back into position.
6. Replace the toner cartridge in the printer (fig. 2.26).
7. Close the printer’s top cover.
8. Slide the paper cassette back into the printer until it snaps into
place.

Status Messages
Often, you can solve questions by checking the display window on
your printer’s front panel for printer status or service messages.
Printer Status Messages

The following messages alert you to the general status of your printer
or to situations which you can solve easily without a long
troubleshooting process or a service call.
Accel-a-Writer Power to the printer has been turned

on and the printer is coming up to full
power before beginning to initialize.
FEED <PAGE SIZE> Manual feed is selected. <PAGE SIZE>

is replaced by the size of the selected
media, such as letter.
FIRST JOB The printer is checking to see if there is

an initializing file (such as
STARTPAGE) which needs to be run.
INITIALIZING The printer is warming up, performing

setup routines, and getting ready to go
on line.
NO EP-CART The toner cartridge is either not in the

printer or not seated in place. Install a
toner cartridge or reseat the current one.
OFFLINE The printer is off line which means it is

not ready to receive and process data.
PAPER JAM A media jam has occurred along the

paper path. Clear the jam using the
procedure in “Clearing Jams” earlier in
this chapter.

PAPER OUT Either the cassette is pulled out, the
selected media source is out of paper, or
trays have different size media loaded
when tray chaining is selected. Push the
cassette in, fill the current media
cassette or tray, or make sure the same
size media is in all cassettes when
chaining.
PRINTER OPEN The printer is not closed completely.

Make sure the top and back covers and
the output tray are closed completely.
PROCESSING The printer is processing a job, getting it

ready to print.
READY/FONT ACCEL The Font Accelerator is updating the

RAM disk at runtime with the most
recently used fonts.
READY/IDLE The printer is on line and ready to

accept a print job.
READY/PRINTING The printer is completing a print job and

ready to accept a new job to begin
processing.
RESET 1 The printer has reset to factory default

settings and the On Line and Tray Select
keys can be released safely.
RESET TO STOP The printer has been taken off line

during an active job.
RESETTING JOB The printer is resetting after the Reset ↑

key has been pressed and an active job
has been cancelled.
TEST PRINT The printer is printing a test page when

the printer is off line and not working
within the menu structure.

TONER LOW The toner is running low. Try
redistributing toner in the current
cartridge or install a new toner cartridge.
WAITING The printer is waiting to receive more

data on a job before printing.
WARMING UP The printer is warming up and the fuser

unit has not reached optimum temperature
yet. Wait until READY/IDLE appears in
the window before sending a job to the
printer.
Printer Service Messages

The following messages indicate mechanical issues requiring a
service call. Make a note of the message before calling.
SERVICE A The fuser unit needs attention.
SERVICE B The laser diode, scanning mirror, or

scanning motor needs attention.
SERVICE E An engine part other than one covered

by SERVICE A or B needs attention.
Preliminary Troubleshooting
This section covers both a general once over of the printer and
specific problems that occur with the printer and with the Macintosh,
PC, or Ethernet environments. Also, Ethernet troubleshooting is
covered in the Ethernet upgrade documentation.
The General Checkup

The most common causes of printing problems also are the easiest to
solve. Check the following items first.
• Make sure the power cord is plugged into the printer and the
power source.
• Make sure the power source is working.
• Make sure all cables are connected and seated properly.
Macintosh Environment Checkup
For printing problems not related to the quality of the output, the
following checklist may provide a solution.
• Make sure all LocalTalk cabling and transformer boxes are
connected correctly. If there are any open sockets, close them
with terminating resistors. See “Connecting in a Macintosh
Environment” in chapter 2.
• Make sure the correct Adobe PostScript print driver icon, your
printer, and the AppleTalk button are selected in the Chooser.
• Make sure the correct Adobe PostScript print driver and your
printer’s PPD are in your System Folder.
• Make sure you install screen fonts to match the printer fonts you
use.
• If you have an Ethernet setup, make sure all Ethernet cabling is
connected correctly. See your network documentation for details.
• If you have an Ethernet setup and a system version before 7.5 ,
open the Control Panel, click Network, and make sure EtherTalk
is selected. For System 7.5 and later, select Ethernet from the
AppleTalk control panel.
PC Environment Checkup
For printing problems not related to the quality of the output, the
following checklist may provide a solution.
• Make sure your application, printer, and host communications
settings all match. You can check and change printer settings
through the front panel (see “The Configuration Menu Structure”
in chapter 5). See your application and host documentation for
checking and changing those respective settings.
• Try sending an end-of-job marker using the XANTÉ Utilities D.PS
file. If the previous job lacked this marker, the printer expects more
data and will not print until it receives the end-of-job. See chapter 4,
“PC Setup,” for details.

Miscellaneous Troubleshooting
This section covers miscellaneous troubleshooting except for print
quality. Print quality troubleshooting is covered in the next section.
§ The printer powers on, but no start-up page prints.
∞ Possible Solutions:
• The start-up page option may not be enabled. To

check this, press the Menu → key until
SETUP:MISCELLANEOUS appears in the
window. Press the Enter ↓ key to enter the
Miscellaneous menu. Then, if necessary, press the
Menu → key until MISCELLANEOUS:STARTUP
PAGE appears in the window and press the Enter ↓
key.
If STARTUP PAGE:YES is capitalized, this

feature is enabled; if so, press the On Line key and
skip to the next bullet item in this list. If not, press
the Enter ↓ key to select this option; then press the
On Line key. Turn the printer off and back on; the
start-up page should print.
• Check the front panel window for messages.
• Make sure the toner cartridge is installed.
• Make sure that the source cassette or tray is

selected and it has media loaded. If you use a
cassette, make sure it is seated firmly in the
printer.
• Remove the paper cassette from the printer. If

there is no front panel activity or engine light
activity, replace the paper cassette, turn the printer
off and try to start it again.

§ The printer powers up, but I cannot print from my application.
• Make sure all cables are connected and seated

properly.
• Make sure the printer is on line. The On Line key

LED should be lit and the window should read
READY/IDLE or READY/PRINTING. If not,
press the On Line key once to put the printer on line.
• Make sure the printer is selected in the Chooser

(Macintosh) or in the Control Panel (PC ).
• Remove the paper cassette from the printer. If

there is no front panel activity or engine light
activity, replace the paper cassette, turn the printer
off, and start the printer again.
§ All the lights on the printer are staying on.
∞ Possible Solution:
• Be patient. Each time you turn your printer on, a

RAM test is performed. For the printers with large
RAM sizes, this test can take a little longer.
§ When I print a legal size document, the text is chopped off for
a letter size page.
• If you are printing from the manual feed tray,

select manual feed within your application.
• Select legal paper size within your application.

§ When printing a legal size page, the printer jams on the output
tray.
• The printer does not see the paper size as legal.

Make sure that the cassette is set for legal size and
that legal size paper is chosen within your
application. Then, try printing the file again.
• Select legal paper size and manual feed within

your application. Then, print from the manual feed
tray.
• Make sure the auxiliary output tray is extended.
§ When downloading a font or PostScript file using System 7, the

Macintosh displays the message, “Looking for LaserWriter ”
and then “Cannot find printer on chooser”.
• Verify that the correct Adobe PostScript printer

driver is in the Extensions folder in the Systems
folder.
• Remove any LaserPrep files from the System and

Extensions folders.
• Turn both your Macintosh and printer off and then

back on again.
• Select the Chooser from the Apple menu, make

sure AppleTalk is active, and select your printer.
• If you have an Ethernet setup, select Control

Panels from the Apple menu; then select Network
and make sure EtherTalk is selected. Also, make
sure the printer and Macintosh are connected
securely.
• Continue printing as usual.

§ My printer does not show up on the Chooser.
• Check for proper termination on all LocalTalk

cables and boxes. See “Connecting in a Macintosh
Environment” in chapter 2.
• If you have an Ethernet setup, make sure all

Ethernet cabling is connected correctly. See your
network documentation for details.
• Make sure the interface is enabled.
• Disable all background printing and print spoolers.
• Try a new cable between your Macintosh host and

printer.
• Reboot the printer and your host. Try selecting

your printer from the Chooser again.
Print Quality Troubleshooting

This section covers print quality troubleshooting. For other general
troubleshooting matters, see the previous section “Miscellaneous
Troubleshooting.”
§ The solid black print is washed out.
• Clean the printer. See “Cleaning the Printer” in

chapter 9.
• Remove the toner cartridge and redistribute the

toner. See “Adjusting Toner Output” in chapter 7
for details.

• Use laser quality media and make sure it meets all
the requirements in the “Selecting Media” in
chapter 7.
• Install a new toner cartridge. See “The Toner

Cartridge” in chapter 2 for details.
§ Scanned images are dark and the details are lost.
• Check the original image to see if it is dark. If not,

rescan the image and try to print it again.
• Try increasing the printer’s gamma setting which

adjusts midrange grayscale values to bring out
details. See “Gamma Corrections” in chapter 8 for
details.
§ Horizontal banding on images occurs when printing.
• Use a new toner cartridge, not a refilled toner

cartridge.

chapter 9.

toner. See “Adjusting Toner Output” in chapter 7
for details.
• Install a new toner cartridge. Remember, a new

cartridge may need a short break-in run of several
copies since toner settles during storage. Chapter 2
covers toner installation.

• Replace the media with new media, making sure it
meets all the requirements in “Selecting Media” in
chapter 7.
• Adjust the screen frequency for the images within

the applications. The printer default screen
frequency is 85 lpi. See chapter 8, “Advanced
Features,” for screen frequency details.
• Set the printer for a resolution higher than 600 dpi

if one is available. See “The Configuration Menu
Structure” in chapter 5 for details.
Large dots occur in a vertical line on the page.
• Clean the static charge area. See “Cleaning the

Printer” in chapter 9.
§ Vertical white lines occur on the page.

chapter 9.

toner. See “Adjusting Toner Output” in chapter 7.

copies since toner settles during storage. See “The
Toner Cartridge” in chapter 2 for details.

chapter 7.

§ Marks on the page occur in the same horizontal location but
staggered in the vertical direction.

chapter 9.


copies since toner settles during storage. See “The
Toner Cartridge” in chapter 2 for details.
§ The start-up page has banding along the horizontal axis of the
page.

chapter 9.

• Install a new toner cartridge. See “The Toner


chapter 7.
§ Under Windows, character spacing is altered, changing

pagination when printing a document at a resolution that is
different than the resolution defined when it was created.
• Make sure you select a resolution in your

application that is available in your printer.

§ When duplexing, toner does not fix properly on the paper.
• Pull out the back cover release latch and slide the
back unit open as far as it will go; then, locate the
duplexer’s mode switch (fig. A.12).
• Set the mode switch to 2 before printing. Then,

switch it back to 1 when you finish printing.
Fig. A.12 The Mode Switch
§ When duplexing, toner scatters on the paper.
• Pull out the back cover release latch and slide the
back unit open as far as it will come; then, locate
the duplexer’s mode switch (fig. A.12).
• Set the mode switch to 2 before printing. Then,

switch it back to 1 when you finish printing.

§ When duplexing, the paper wrinkles and corners fold over.
• Make sure media meets the guidelines in “Media

Specifications” in chapter 7.
• Pull out the paper and turn it around so the

opposite side loads first. Then, reload it and try to
print again.
• If using recycled paper, check for wrinkling or

folding. We suggest that you do not use recycled
paper because it absorbs moisture easily, which
makes it more pliant. (See “Media Specifications”
in chapter 7 for details.)
• If paper has been moved from another

environment, it may require time to adjust to the
new conditions. This may take up to two hours,
especially if the paper moves from a humid to a
dry location.
Calling for Technical Support

Even with XANTÉ’s dedication to building quality, reliable
products, there may be occasions when you need additional help.
XANTÉ’s experienced Technical Support personnel can help you
resolve configuration and printing issues by phone, fax, bulletin
board, and the internet.
Most printer problems can be solved by following the suggestions in

this chapter. If these solutions do not work, gather the following
troubleshooting information, and then call XANTÉ’s Technical
Support.

Troubleshooting Information
• A start-up page from the printer
• The model of your printer
• The printer ROM version (Newer printers: press the On
Line key for 5 seconds; the version appears in the window.
Older printers: the version is on each ROM chip on the
controller board.)
• The type of host and the operating system (version
number) you are using
• The current interface in use (and communication settings if
using the serial interface)
• The amount of printer memory (this appears on the
start-up page)
• The application(s), including the version(s) used
• A full description of the problem
• A list of error or status messages if they appear
If you have the troubleshooting information available when you call,

it helps our technicians serve you more quickly.
XANTÉ Phone Support

Before you call for support, be sure to gather the information listed
in the previous section. Contact XANTÉ’s Technical Support at 800-
926-8393 in the US and Canada and at 334-342-4846 elsewhere
from 7 a.m. until 7 p.m. Central time Monday through Thursday and
7 a.m. until 6 p.m. Central time on Friday.

XANTÉ Fax Support
If you prefer, fax questions to XANTÉ’s Technical Support at
334-342-4635. Include your name, your company name and the
information listed under “Troubleshooting Information” earlier in
this section. Also, indicate whether you wish the response to be
faxed, phoned, or e-mailed and include your appropriate number.
XANTÉ Bulletin Board Support

XANTÉ provides a 24 hour technical service bulletin board. The
board number is 334-342-4746. The setup is 8 data bits, no parity,
and one stop bit with baud rates up to 14,400.
Before you use the bulletin board, be sure to gather and include the
information listed under “Troubleshooting Information” earlier in
this section. New users can log on as new.
The XANTÉ bulletin board contains the latest utility files and
technical bulletins. You can also use the bulletin board to upload
problem files for us to test.
XANTÉ Internet Support

XANTÉ’s web page at www.xante.com contains a Product Support
section where you can download printer drivers, software, PPDs,
manuals, and other technical information. The FAQ section answers
the most frequently asked questions about each product. The web
includes a list of important phone numbers and e-mail addresses.
If, after reading the web page, you still have questions, you can send
an e-mail to techsupport@xante.com. Be sure to include the
information listed under “Troubleshooting Information” in your
e-mail.
◊◊◊

Appendix B
Application Notes and Page Design
Appendix Overview
Introduction .................................................................................... B-3
Application Notes .......................................................................... B-3
FreeHand ........................................................................................ B-4
FreeHand (PC) ......................................................................... B-4
FreeHand (Macintosh) ............................................................. B-4
QuarkXPress .................................................................................. B-5
QuarkXPress (PC) ................................................................... B-5
QuarkXPress (Macintosh) ....................................................... B-6
PageMaker ..................................................................................... B-8
PageMaker Setup (PC) ............................................................ B-8
PageMaker Setup (Macintosh) ................................................ B-8
Using PageMaker 6.0 and 6.5 ................................................ B-11
CorelDRAW ................................................................................. B-12
AutoCAD 12 for PostScript ......................................................... B-12
Configuring AutoCAD 12 ..................................................... B-12
Printing from AutoCAD 12 ................................................... B-14
Adobe Separator 5.0 (Macintosh) ................................................ B-15
MultiAd Creator ........................................................................... B-16
Page Design.................................................................................. B-16
Typefaces and Fonts .............................................................. B-16
Other Elements of Design ............................................................ B-19
Orientation ............................................................................. B-19
Pitch ....................................................................................... B-20
Point Size and x-Height ......................................................... B-20
Spacing .................................................................................. B-22
Page Design Tips ................................................................... B-22
______________________ Application Notes and Page Design B-1

Notes
B-2 Application Notes and Page Designbb _____________________

Introduction
The first half of this appendix provides some helpful information and
hints on working with some of today’s most popular applications in
Macintosh and PC environments. The second half deals with general
page design theory and hints.
Application Notes
You should be familiar with all standard procedures for your
working environment. This includes how to click, drag, copy, choose
commands, select options, use buttons and boxes, locate files, and
scroll windows.
The method of performing specific printing tasks may vary

depending upon your application, your operating system, and version
of printer driver used. See chapter 6 for details about using the
current Adobe PostScript printer driver. Check the application
documentation to determine where to find and how to use these
options.
Some older applications do not offer all of the printer’s features or

options. For example, some older PageMaker versions do not
include a resolution option; you must select the resolution through
the printer’s front panel. If options are available in several places,
application selections override the printer’s front panel setting. If
there is a question or if the job does not print as expected, select the
desired setting both through the application and through the front
panel.

FreeHand
The XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM includes special printer description
files to use with older Aldus Macintosh versions of FreeHand. You
need to install the file required by your version of FreeHand and
your system environment. Older PC versions and newer Macintosh
and PC versions do not require extra files.
FreeHand (PC)
In a PC environment, FreeHand works with the XANTÉ Utilities
Windows printer description file; see chapter 4, “PC Setup,” for
details about installing this file.
FreeHand (Macintosh)
In a Macintosh environment, FreeHand uses files known as PPD files
(PostScript Printer Description files). See chapter 3, “Macintosh
Setup,” for details about installing this file.
When you print, use your printer’s PPDs to obtain the best quality
from your XANTÉ printer. This section covers changing to the
required PPD for FreeHand versions 3.1 and 4.0. If you have another
version, check the application documentation for details on selecting
the PPD.
FreeHand 3.1: To change to the required PPD
1. Choose Print from the File Menu.
2. Click Change in the Print Dialog Box. The Print Options

window appears.
3. Select your printer’s PPD in the Printer Type box in the Print
dialog box.
4. Select other desired options and then print from FreeHand as

you normally would.

FreeHand 4.0: To change to the required PPD
1. Choose Print from the File Menu.
2. Click Print in the lower left corner (not the upper right) of the
Print Dialog Box. The Print Options window appears.
3. Click Select PPD. A list of printers appears.
4. Select your printer from the list. The pop-up menu closes.
5. Select other desired options and then print from FreeHand as

you normally would.
QuarkXPress
The XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM includes special printer description
files to use with QuarkXPress. Install the file required for the
program’s version and your system environment.
Note: Load the XANTÉ PDF following the instructions in chapter

3 (Macintosh) or chapter 4 (PC). However, if you have
printing problems, you may want to try changing the PDF
selection to Generic B&W and set Page Size only at the top
of the QuarkXPress Page Setup dialog box. Also, if you use
a custom page size, it is best to use the Generic B&W
option.
QuarkXPress (PC)
QuarkXPress versions between 3.3 and 4.0 require a PDF (printer
description file) in addition to the PPD file. XANTÉ Utilities disks
include QuarkXPress PDF files for both the standard and wide
format printer options in the PDFs folder. We recommend that you
use these PDFs to obtain the best quality from your XANTÉ printer.
See “PDFs Folder” in chapter 4 for details about installing this file.
Note: QuarkXPress 4.0 does not need a PDF.

QuarkXPress Page Setup (PC)
1. Create your document.
2. Select Printer Setup from the File menu. The Printer Setup
window appears.
3. Select the Use PDF For: option and hold down the shift key. A
list of printers appears.
4. Select either your printer’s name that is not italicized or

Generic B&W. Then click OK.
5. Select Print from the File menu. The Print dialog box appears.
6. Set other options as desired. Then, click OK to print.
QuarkXPress (Macintosh)
QuarkXPress versions between 3.3 and 4.0 require a PDF (printer
description file) in addition to the PPD file. XANTÉ Utilities
includes PDF files for both the standard and wide format printer
options in the QuarkXPress PDF folder in the Drivers folder. We
recommend that you use these PDFs to obtain the best quality from
your XANTÉ printer. See “App Drivers Folder” in chapter 3 for
details about installing this file.
Note: QuarkXPress 4.0 does not need a PDF.
QuarkXPress Page Setup

1. Create your document.
2. Select Page Setup from the File menu. The Page Setup dialog
box appears.
3. Make the following selections:
Paper: select the media’s page size

Printer Type: hold down the shift key and select the Non-
italicized name of your printer.
Paper Size: select the same size as you did for Paper if
you chose the name of your printer under
Printer Type. The top may be the size name
and the bottom the measurement; for
example, Paper = Tabloid and Paper Size =
11 x 17. If you chose Generic B&W, there is
no Paper Size option.
Note: Resolution cannot be changed in the page setup box; it

has no effect on the printer. Printer resolution must be
set in the Print Options dialog box.
4. Click OK. Then select Print from the File menu. The Print
dialog box appears.
5. Click Options. Then, make the following selections.
PostScript Errors: Select Print Detailed Report
Resolution: Select the desired resolution supported by

your printer
Note: Set other options, such as Enhanced Screen, Gamma,

and Tray Switch as desired.
6. Click OK. Then, click Print.
Screen Frequency and Angle in QuarkXPress

You can adjust the screen frequency and the screen angle in the Page
Setup dialog box. We recommend you set the screen angle at 45˚ and
the screen frequency range between 60 lpi and 106 lpi. The printer’s
default is 85 lpi.
Also, resolution plays a role in selecting lpi. A high lpi, such as 105,
will produce better output at a higher resolution such as 1200 x 1200
dpi. For more information on lpi selection, see chapter 8, “Advanced
Features.”

When printing tiff images, select the image, then go to Style and
select “Other Screen.” Then, you can select your own specifications
for screen setting, angle setting, and dot pattern.
Once you select settings, save the document to retain the settings
when the document is reopened.
PageMaker
The XANTÉ Utilities CD-ROM includes Aldus PPDs to use with
older Aldus versions of PageMaker. Install the file required for the
program’s version and your system environment.
PageMaker Setup (PC)

For PageMaker versions earlier than 5.0, copy the Aldus PPD into
the Aldus PPD4 folder. When you print from PageMaker, select the
PPD in the Print window under Printer Type.
For PageMaker 5.0 place the XANTÉ PPD into the Aldus PPD4
folder.
For PageMaker 6.0 and 6.5, copy the printer’s PPD into the PPD4
folder (PM6 or 6.5: Rsrc: Usenglsh: PPD4). When you print from
PageMaker, select the PPD in the Print window under Printer Type.
Note: Remember to update PPDs in the Aldus Additions Function.

See your PageMaker documentation for details.
PageMaker Setup (Macintosh)

PageMaker versions earlier than 5.0 require the Aldus PPD
(PostScript Printer Description) file in addition to the standard PPD
file supplied for your printer. XANTÉ Utilities disks include these
PPD files for both the standard and wide format printer options in the
Aldus PPD folder in the Drivers folder on the Macintosh Utilities
disk.

Load and configure the Adobe printer driver and your printer’s PPD
following instructions in chapter 3, “Macintosh Setup.” Then, install
the XANTÉ PPD for Aldus PageMaker by copying the appropriate
PPD file from the utilities disk to the Aldus PPD folder in the System
Folder.
The PPDs are named according to the printer. A W after the name
indicates the PPD is for use on printers with the wide format option.
Selecting the PPD in PageMaker 4.2 and later.

After you install the PPD file for your version of PageMaker, select
the PPD using the procedure below for your versions of PageMaker.
This section covers versions 4.2, 5.0, and 6.0. If you have another
version, check the application documentation for details on selecting
the PPD.
Note: PageMaker 4.0 uses APD files, rather than the Aldus PPDs
supplied on the utilities disks. This version is limited in the
new printer features that it can use. Different APDs are
available for specific printer resolutions. This version of
PageMaker will not allow a 25.00" (635 mm) format.
Instead, the B25 oversized page is formatted for a 22.00"
(559 mm) page, and the image is positioned at the bottom of
the 25.00" (635 mm) page. If you are using PageMaker 4.0,
contact XANTÉ Technical Support for a copy of the APD
file for your printer (see appendix A for XANTÉ Technical
Support information).
PageMaker 4.2: After you install the PPD file for your version of
PageMaker, use the following procedure to select the desired PPD
file.
1. Open your PageMaker document.
2. Choose Print from the File menu. The print dialog box appears
with a Printer option in the bottom half of the window.

3. Select the Printer option box and hold the mouse button down.
A pop-up menu appears with a list of available PPD files.
4. Choose your printer’s PPD. The pop-up menu disappears and

the selected file appears in the Printer box.
5. Make any other selections you want in the Print dialog box.
6. Click Print to send the job to the printer.
PageMaker 5.0: After you install the PPD file for your PageMaker
version, use the following procedure to select the desired PPD file.
2. Choose Print from the File menu. The print dialog box appears
with a Type option in the top half of the window.
3. Select the Type option box and hold the mouse button down. A
pop-up menu appears with a list of available PPD files.

the selected file appears in the Type box.
5. Make any other selections you want in the Print dialog box.
PageMaker 6.0 and 6.5: To select the PPD file
2. Choose Print from the File menu. The Print dialog box appears
with a PPD option in the top half of the window.
3. Select the PPD option box and hold the mouse button down. A
pop-up menu appears with a list of available PPD files.

the selected file appears in the PPD box.
5. Click Features. The Printer Features window appears.

6. Make sure the Installed Memory, Spooler Enabled, Optional
Duplexer, Optional Wide Format, Optional Lower Tray, and
TraySwitch settings match your setup. (See the next section,
“Using PageMaker 6.0 and 6.5,” for details.) Then, click
Document to return to the Print dialog box.
7. Make any other desired selections in the Print dialog box.
Using PageMaker 6.0 and 6.5

From the print dialog box, select the Features menu. Printer options
that are set through the Options menu in most applications are set
through the Features menu in PageMaker 6.0 and 6.5. See chapter 6,
“PPD Settings,” for a description of the printer features available
through this menu.
In addition to the standard printer options described in chapter 6,

PageMaker requires that the following options be set in the Features
menu of the print dialog box.
• Installed Memory must be set to agree with your printer and

Chooser configuration. Your printer’s installed resolution
upgrade will not appear in the Resolution menu of the
Pagemaker Features dialog box unless the Installed Memory
option is properly configured.
• Spooler Enabled must be set to True to enable the Save

Spooled Job menu in the Features section of the PageMaker
Print dialog box. The spooler must also be enabled for the
interface you are using (through the front panel or XANTÉ
Command Center) and configured in the Chooser or Windows
configuration.
• Optional Duplexer must be set to agree with your printer and

Chooser or Windows configuration.
• Optional Wide Format must be set to agree with your printer

and Chooser or Windows configuration.

• Optional Lower Tray must be set to agree with your printer
and Chooser or Windows configuration to allow you to select
the lower tray as the media source. This option does not have
to be selected to use the PageMaker TraySwitch option.
• TraySwitch allows you to select the printer’s tray chaining

feature on a per job basis. Printer’s Default used the setting
configured on the printer’s front panel. True and False enable
or disable the tray chaining feature for the current job,
regardless of the front panel setting.
Check the Options menu in the print dialog box. Make sure that
Include PostScript Error Handler is marked. This handler feature
causes an error page to print if a PostScript error occurs; in turn, this
page helps identify the problem.
Check the Paper menu of the print dialog box. Select the appropriate
paper size and paper source for the job. The paper size must match
the size of the paper installed for the job to print correctly.
CorelDRAW
When you print from CorelDRAW, you must change the printer’s
option for Enhanced Screen to None and Gamma to 0 or else the
output line screen (lpi) will not change.
AutoCAD 12 for PostScript

AutoCAD is an engineering design package. This section covers how
to configure AutoCAD to print to your printer and once that is done,
how to print from AutoCAD.
Configuring AutoCAD 12
After you install AutoCAD release 12, configure the program to print
to your printer using the following procedure.

1. Select Configure from the File menu. A Configure menu
appears.
2. Select Configure plotter. The Plotter Configuration menu

appears.
3. Select Add a plotter configuration. The Available Plotters

screen appears.
4. Select Postscript Device ADI 4.2 - by AutoDesk, Inc.
5. Under Supported Models, select 300 dpi. The question “Do

you want color?” appears.
Note: Even though 300 dpi is selected in the application, the

document prints at the resolution set on the printer.
6. Select Yes to answer the question. Then, the question, “Do you
wish to append a ^Z?” appears.
7. Select NO. The question “Is your PostScript device connected

to a <S>erial or <P>arallel port?” appears.
8. Select the port the printer is connected to, serial or parallel.
9. Enter the address of the port you selected or press the Enter
key if there is no change.
10. Check over your device location, and if you are satisfied, press
the Enter key for no changes. The question “Do you want to
change anything?” appears.
11. Check over the list for all the selections. If you want to make
changes, type YES and press the Enter key; then make the
desired changes. If not, type NO, press the Enter key. The
message “Enter a description for the plotter:” appears.
12. Enter the name you would like for the printer to have (such as
PMII).
13. Select Exit to the Configure menu.
AutoCAD is now configured to print from your printer.

Printing from AutoCAD 12
After you configure AutoCAD to print from your printer, use the
following procedure to print from AutoCAD.
1. Open your AutoCAD program.
2. Select Plot from the File menu. The Plot Configuration

window appears (fig. B.1).
Plot Configuration
Device and Default Information Paper Size and Orientation
PlateMaker Inches
Device and Default Selection... Size... User
MM
Pen Parameters Plot Area 16.50 By 10.50
Pen Assignment... Optimization... Scale, Rotation and Origin
Additional Parameters Rotation and Origin...
Display Hide Lines Plotted Inches = Drawing Units
Extents 10.5 9
Limits Adjust Area Fill Scale To Fit
View
Windows Plot To File Plot Preview
Views... Window... File Name... Preview... Partial Full
OK Cancel Help
Fig. B.1 The Plot Configuration Window
3. Click Device and Default Selection. A pop-up menu appears

with a list of available printers. Choose the printer you
configured with the ADI - 4.2 driver. The pop-up menu
disappears and the selected printer appears in the Plot
Configuration window.
4. Click Size in the Paper Size and Orientation box. A window

appears where you can enter or select the height and width of
the paper you are using.
5. Enter or select the width and height of the paper which you are
going to use respectively in the Width and Height fields. Then,
click OK and the Plot Configuration window appears again.

6. Make sure Scale to Fit is selected in the Scale, Rotation, and
Origin box.
7. Select OK.
Now you are ready to plot your document. Refer to your AutoCAD
manual for further details.
AutoCAD Tip: To make your printer the default printer so that you
do not need to select it each time you open a document, use the
following procedure.
1. Open an AutoCAD document.
2. Select Print from the File menu.
3. Click and hold on the Printer box. A window appears listing

printer drivers.
4. Click Cancel.
5. Save the document.
The next time the document is opened, your printer will be the default
printer. Use this same process with any other documents that were
created and saved with a different printer selected as the output device.
Adobe Separator 5.0 (Macintosh)

Adobe Illustrator and Adobe Separator come bundled together. The
Adobe Illustrator 5.0 application does not operate with a PostScript
printer description (PPD) file. However, Adobe Separator 5.0
requires a PPD file on the 4.0 Adobe Specifications.
The PPD files are on the Macintosh XANTÉ Utilities that comes
along with the printer. Choose the PPDs without the PM50
extensions and copy them into any folder on the Macintosh. In your
application, you will get the option “Open PPD.” If you click on this
option, you can tell Adobe Separator where the chosen PPD file is
located on the Macintosh.

MultiAd Creator
Your printer’s PPD should be placed in the PPD folder in the
MultiAd Creator folder.
Page Design
Advanced imaging includes not only the mechanical side of printing,
but also the elements of page design. Your printer with true Adobe
PostScript 3 takes care of most of the mechanical side, allowing you
such freedom as scaling, rotating, and filling text and graphics.
However, a basic understanding of terms and elements of page
design can help you add finishing touches for a truly professional
image.
The rest of this chapter deals with some of the language and
elements used in desktop publishing page design.
Typefaces and Fonts

Two very important terms to understand are typefaces and fonts.
These terms often are used interchangeably which can lead to
confusion sometimes. A font is actually a subdivision of a typeface.
Typeface refers to the style of printing type, not the size. The style
includes design elements such as spacing, stroke, and weight which
are covered later in this chapter.
A font is one size of a typeface and includes all the available

characters of that typeface.

Serif, Sans Serif, and Miscellaneous Typefaces
Typefaces fall into three categories of styles, serif, sans serif, and
miscellaneous. A serif is an extra flourish or decoration added to the
end of a main line forming a letter, character, or symbol.
PostScript PostScript
Serif (Times Roman) Sans Serif (Helvetica)
ΠοστΣχριπτ
Miscellaneous (Symbol)
Fig. B.2 Serif and Sans Serif Typefaces
Serif typefaces include extra flourishes such as the small circle at

the top of the a or the small tails hanging down each end of the cross
bar in the T in Times Roman (fig. B.2).
Sans Serif typefaces lack the decorations. Sans means without, and
these typefaces have very clean, plain lines such as those found in
the Helvetica typeface (fig. B.2).
Miscellaneous typefaces include those which have combinations of

serif and sans serif designs as well as graphic type characters such as
arrows, hearts, squares, or Greek symbols.
Each typeface category lends itself to particular areas of page design.

For example, the small detailed lines on a serif typeface help draw a
reader’s eye across a line of text. This makes it well suited for body
text such as the Times Roman font used in this manual.

The clean, sharp lines of a sans serif typeface make it excellent for
short headlines or signs. The lack of detail, makes it easier for the
eye to group several words into a short phrase, grasping the meaning
at a glance. However, it lacks the drawing effect of details which
make long text blocks easier to read.
Miscellaneous typefaces are handy to draw attention to a particular

section of the page or indicate breaks in topics or sections. For
example, three diamonds ( ◊ ◊ ◊ ) signal the ends of major chapters
in this manual.
Italic, Oblique, Bold, Demi, Medium and Light Forms

Typefaces can be broken down into various forms to help distinguish
them. These forms include italic, oblique, bold, demi, medium, light,
and narrow.
Italic and oblique forms are the printed versions of hand written
(cursive) copy. Although the letters do not touch, their slant gives the
impression of being written in long hand. Italic forms are designed
individually, while oblique are mechanically slanted forms of the
original typeface.
Times Italic Helvetica Oblique
Fig. B.3 Italic and Oblique Typefaces
Bold, demi, medium, and light forms are created by varying the
stroke weight (density) of character lines.
Times Bold
ITC AvantGarde Demi
ITC Zapf Chancery-Medium-Italic
ITC Bookman Light
Fig. B.4 Bold, Demi, Medium, and Light Typefaces

The forms can be used separately or in combination to add to the
impact of the printed copy. For example, the following note has a
bold italic introduction to draw attention, but the body text switches
back to a medium weight (sometimes referred to as roman) format
for easy readability.
Note: Although forms may be combined such as a bold italic

version, if you change forms too often within a document,
the forms tend to lose the power to draw attention and end
up with a cluttered appearance.
Other Elements of Design

Other elements of design include orientation, pitch, point size, x-
Height, and spacing.
Orientation
The terms portrait and landscape orientations come from the art
world and indicate the direction of a picture or copy on the page.
Usually portraits are narrow in width and long in length while
landscapes are wider across and shorter in length. The same is true
when you print from your printer. Copy across the narrow direction
of the page is in portrait orientation which is used for most business
letters. Landscape orientation goes across the wide dimension of the
page and is used often for spreadsheets and graphs.
Portrait Landscape
Fig. B.5 Page Orientations

Pitch
Pitch, sometimes referred to as cpi or characters per inch, indicates
the number of characters which can fit horizontally within one inch.
For example, your printer has the PCL typeface Courier 10 pitch, 12
points. Ten characters fit within an inch and the size is 12 points in
height.
This is 10 characters/inch pitch

1 2 3
Fig. B.6 Pitch Samples
Point Size and x-Height

Point size comes from an old typesetting term for a typeface’s
height. This is measured from the top of highest ascender (the
upward stroke on a character) to the lowest descender (the downward
stoke) within a character set (fig. B.7).

Ready
6 Point
8 Point
10 Point
12 Point 72
Point
14 Point
18 Point
24 Point
54 Point
PostScript
Ascender
x-Height
Descender
Fig. B.7 Point Size and x-Height
The height of a lowercase letter without an ascender or descender is

referred to as the x-Height. This measurement varies from typeface
to typeface and can cause an optical illusion where the same size
typefaces appear to be different sizes.

Spacing
Character spacing has two forms, monospacing and proportional
spacing (fig. B.8). Monospaced characters have equal spacing
between each letter which is sometimes referred to as fixed spacing.
An excellent example is the resident Courier typeface. Monospacing
has a mechanical, block look and works extremely well for
spreadsheets where multiple columns of numbers need to be aligned.
Proportional spacing varies the width between characters. For

example the letter l needs less space than a w. Except for Courier, the
rest of your printer’s resident PostScript typefaces are proportionally
spaced. Proportional spacing is more legible, better for most
documents not requiring multiple aligned columns.
123456789 123456789
PostScript PostScript
Monospacing Proportional spacing
Courier Times Roman
Fig. B.8 Character Spacings
Page Design Tips

Often little design details make the difference between an adequate
or professional job. The following tips may help you produce the
best possible output from your printer.
• Keep your page design simple. Too many typeface and design
element changes can produce a cluttered, confusing page.
• Always consider your audience. For example, readers with visual
problems or those just learning to read will respond better to
larger point sizes. A conservative reader may prefer a traditional
typeface such as Times Roman.

• Usually, serif typefaces are more legible for large bodies of text,
while sans serifs work better for headlines.
• Keep text column widths under 4" to reduce the chance of a
reader losing his place when his eyes move from the end of one
line to the beginning of the next.
• All capitalized text is much harder to read than mixed case text.
• Vary paragraph lengths to help readers keep track of where they
are on the page.
• Keep most paragraphs to five lines or less to help prevent long
text blocks from tiring or intimidating readers. Mixing line
lengths within a paragraph also helps.
• Match your typeface to the subject. For example, Zapf Chancery is
perfect for formal invitations, while Helvetica Bold works
better for EXIT signs.
• Use white space (wider margins, more space between section
headings and paragraphs, etc.) to decrease a cluttered, heavy text
look.
These are suggestions which work well in most cases. Your printer
and Adobe PostScript make it easy for you to test these tips and
select the ones that work best for your particular job.
◊◊◊

Glossary
___________________________________________ Glossary G-1

Notes
G-2 Glossarybb __________________________________________

Glossary
∆E
(Pronounced Delta-E), a calculation of the relative position of two
colors in a color space, which indicates how similar the colors are to
one another. A ∆E of 1 is perceptible by the human eye. A ∆E of 6 to
7 is usually considered acceptable in the printing industry.
10Base2
An IEEE Ethernet cabling standard using thin coaxial cable. The
prefix of the name, 10, defines the transmission speed of the cable as
10 Megabits per second; Base indicates that the signal is a baseband
transmission; and 2 describes the approximate maximum length of a
network segment, in hundreds of meters (maximum segment length
in the specification is 189 meters). See also Thinnet.
10BaseT
An IEEE Ethernet cabling standard using UTP (unshielded twisted
pair) cable. The naming convention follows that for 10Base2, except
that the T indicates the cable type (twisted pair), rather than
maximum segment length. See also Unshielded Twisted Pair.
Additive Color Theory

A color theory based on the addition of specific quantities of three
primary colored lights to create all other colors. The most common
primary colored lights used to create additive colors are red, green,
and blue (RGB). Computer monitors and scanners use the RGB
color model to create all other colors.
AppleTalk Network
Multiple computers and/or peripheral devices which are connected
and adhere to the AppleTalk communication protocol.
Application Software
Any software program, such as a desktop publishing program, word
processing program, graphics program, or any program that is
installed in your computer system.
___________________________________________ Glossary G-3

Banding
Three meanings in the context of this manual: 1) visible changes of
shading in a gradient print; 2) lines that appear in a printed image
due to ink drying between print passes; 3) the method of processing
image data in sections.
Baud Rate
The number of bits per second sent or received by a device over a
serial interface.
Bitmapped Image
An image created by the placement of individual dots or pixels on a
grid. In contrast, vector images are created by specifying the location
of points and the description of the lines between these points.
Bleed
An image printed beyond the page margin, so that when trimmed to
size, the image extends to the edge of the sheet. A full bleed is an
image which extends to all four edges of the sheet. Most XANTÉ
printers can print up to an 11.00" x 17.00" (279 mm x 432 mm) full
bleed image on oversized (11.81" x 19.00" [300 mm x 483 mm], or
larger) media. See your manual for information about the media size
that can be used with your printer.
Buffer
A temporary data storage area. For example, a printer buffer holds
incoming data waiting to be processed for printing.
Calibration
The measurement and adjustment of hardware output against a
standard value set to ensure that output is predictable.
Cascade Printing
Printing multiple copies of the same job on more than one printer
simultaneously.
G-4 Glossarybb __________________________________________

Catch up
Globs of ink that appear on final press output. This may be solved
by increasing the amount of water used on the run and then adjusting
the ink/water balance, by increasing the fountain solution, or by
adding wetting agent.
Centronics Interface
An interface standard for parallel data transmission which sends one
byte (8 bits) of data at a time between computers and local
peripheral devices. Parallel interfacing is generally faster than serial
interfacing.
Character Set
The complete set of characters that appear in a typeface family. See
also Typeface and Family.
CMYK Color
A color system based on the mixture of cyan, magenta, yellow, and
black. These ink colors are used to create printer’s process colors.
See Subtractive Color Theory.
Coaxial Cable
An electrical cable made up of an insulated dielectric tube with a
solid wire core. The name is derived from the fact that the
conducting wire and dielectric tube share the same center point or
axis. Coaxial cable is used for cable television connections and
many Ethernet networks.
Color Gamut
The range of colors that can be produced by an output device, such
as a color monitor or printer, or recognized by an input device such
as a scanner or the human eye.
Color Management System (CMS)

Software which translates color information between devices (such
as a printer and a monitor) or between a device and the International
Color Consortium (ICC) format that other system devices can
understand.
___________________________________________ Glossary G-5

Color Profile
A file that describes the color characteristics of a device, as
compared to a standard. A color management system uses color
profiles to convert color information from one device to another.
Color Rendering Dictionary (CRD)

A look up table used to transform device independent color
information, such as CIE based colors, to the CMYK color space
used by printers.
Color Separation
The separation of a color image into the primary (subtractive) colors
for printing. A four color separation produces separate cyan,
magenta, yellow, and black files.
Color Space
A three dimensional representation of colors, such as RGB or CMY.
A color device interprets and reproduces color within a specific color
space.
Colorimeter
A device to measure reflected or transmitted light. It then calculates
the measurements compared to a common standard based on the
human eye’s normal interpretation of red, blue, and green stimulus
under a given light source.
Controller
In the context of the CT4 manual, an intelligent device, such as the
Accel-a-Graphix CT4, that can convert application data into printer
data and control attached printers.
Control Protocol
A method of controlling the flow of data between computer devices,
either hardware (DTR/DSR) or software (XON/XOFF). Also called
handshaking or transmission protocol.
G-6 Glossarybb __________________________________________

Default Settings
The values or settings that are used by your printer or controller, if
no other direction is received from an application. Printer default
settings can be changed by the user using the front panel. Some
settings can be changed through XANTÉ Command Center. See also
Factory Default Settings.
Densitometer
A device that produces a set light source and measures the
transmission of light through or reflection of light from a surface
compared to a common density standard.
Density
A measurement of the transmission of light through or reflection of
light from a surface. For example, the thicker (denser) the ink, the
less light it reflects.
Dot Gain
The result of media absorbing ink which causes the ink to spread out
rather than forming a crisp, precise pattern. This gives the
appearance of a “gain” in value of the tint. For example, an 80%
magenta tint may appear to be 83% because of dot gain. See also
Tint.
Downloaded Font
A font that has been transferred to the memory or hard disk of a
printer or controller.
DPI
Dots Per Inch. The number of dots that can be produced vertically or
horizontally in an inch. In the context of this manual, it is a
measurement of the resolution of a printer. See also Resolution.
Drift
The small changes in the measurement capabilities of an instrument.
For example, over time a monitor can drift in its ability to produce a
100% red because of age, environment, usage, and other factors.
Calibration brings the instrument back in line with standard color
measurements.
___________________________________________ Glossary G-7

DTR/DSR
Data Terminal Ready/Data Set Ready. A hardware implemented
protocol which controls the flow of data in serial communication.
See also XON/XOFF.
Enhanced Screen Technology

XANTÉ technology that optimizes the line screen for an image. The
line screen is based on the printer’s resolution and the number of
gray levels selected.
Error Diffusion
An algorithm that defines the placement of dots on an image based
on data from surrounding cells.
Ethernet
Specification for the physical and data link layers of the OSI
Reference Model. Originally developed by Xerox and jointly
promoted by DEC, Intel, and Xerox (DIX) for local area networks,
Ethernet was adopted by IEEE as the basis for the 802 networking
standards.
EtherTalk
The AppleTalk protocols transmitted over Ethernet media.
Factory Default Settings

Settings programmed into the printer or controller at the factory,
such as English as the default display window language. The default
settings for the printer can be changed using the front panel and, in
some cases, XANTÉ Command Center. See “Configuration” in your
printer or controller manual for instructions to reset to the factory
default settings. See also Default Settings.
Family
The group name of the typeface, which identifies the typeface’s
distinctive shape. Typeface families are often named after their
designers (John Baskerville, Frederick Goudy); they can suggest how
a typeface may be used (Bookman, Century Schoolbook); or they
may describe the typeface’s appearance (Clearface, BrushScript).
See also Typeface.
G-8 Glossarybb __________________________________________

FIFO
First In First Out. FIFO chips are used as hardware buffers to
serialize transmission of data to the print engine.
File Server
A computer specifically intended for storing files that people can
share over the network.
FilmStar
XANTÉ’s desktop system that processes high quality positive or
negative film without the time and expense of camera and darkroom
procedures.
Flow Control
The mechanism used in serial communications to signal when a
device is ready to accept data. This prevents one device from sending
data faster than the receiving device can use or store it. The printer
supports both XON/XOFF (software) and DTR/DSR (hardware)
flow control. The host computer and printer must be set to use the
same flow control protocol.
Font
In the desktop publishing industry, font is often used interchangeably
with the term “typeface.” However, a font is a typeface subset in a
particular point size and style. See also Typeface.
Font Accelerator
XANTÉ technology which sets aside a percentage of available RAM
disk to store fonts. When enabled, the Font Accelerator automatically
loads the most recently used fonts into RAM disk for faster access by
the printer. See also RAM disk.
Gamma Curve
A graphical representation of the relationship between the input
values and the output values of a device, such as a monitor or printer.
If the device reproduces (outputs) the exact values requested (input),
the graph is a straight line.
___________________________________________ Glossary G-9

Gamma Correction
The process of changing the gamma curve of a device by adjusting
midrange grayscale values without altering black shadow and white
highlight values at each end of a gray scale. In addition to the seven
gamma curves supplied on your printer, XANTÉ utilities allow you
to create custom curves for specific conditions.
Gamut
See Color Gamut.
Gamut Mapping
The process of converting the color gamut of one device, such as a
monitor, to that of another device, such as a printer.
Gateway
An electronic device that connects two networks, each of which
operates with a different set of protocols, such as AppleTalk and
EtherTalk.
Ghosting
A faint repetition of a pattern produced during imaging.
Graphic
Information presented in the form of pictures or images.
Grayscale
A media test strip starting with a 100% black swatch and progressing
through lighter gray tints usually in 5% or 10% increments to 0%
black (white).
Halftone
A method of producing the appearance of smooth gradations of color
by printing dots of various sizes at constant intervals on a grid. In
printing, the dots are actually halftone cells, which are, themselves a
grid of printer dots. The size of the halftone is varied by printing or
not printing dots within the halftone cell.
G-10 Glossarybb __________________________________________

Handshaking
An initial communication between two computers, which determines
whether they are connected and compatibly configured to allow two
way data transmission. See also Flow Control .
Hard Disk
A storage medium made up of a magnetic disk or disks (platters)
sealed into a drive or cartridge. Most XANTÉ printers can support
an internal drive and multiple external SCSI drives. The Accel-a-
Graphix CT4 can support multiple internal SCSI drives.
Holdout
Media’s ability to hold ink on the surface, rather than to absorb it.
Ink held on the surface dries in a more precise, crisp pattern than
absorbed ink which spreads out causing dot gain. See also Dot Gain.
IDE
Integrated Drive Electronics. A standard used to integrate a hard disk
with a controller board. XANTÉ printers can be configured with
internal IDE hard disks.
IEEE
Institute of Electronic and Electrical Engineers. An organization
active in the creation of electrical, communication, and networking
standards in the United States.
Imageable Area
In the context of this manual, the area on a page that the printer can
access for printing. For example, on the PlateMaker II, with the extra
wide printing option, a 12.00" x 25.00" (305 mm x 635 mm) page
has an imageable area of 11.97" x 24.93" (304 mm x 633 mm).
Interface Cable
A cable that physically connects two computer devices so that they
can communicate.
___________________________________________ Glossary G-11

Landscape Orientation
A page format that is larger horizontally than it is vertically. The
term comes from painting when artists paint “landscapes” across the
wide dimension of the canvas. See also Portrait Orientation.
Levels of Gray
The number of shades (tonal changes) of gray in a halftone image.
The number depends on the line screen and printing resolution used.
The higher the number, the smoother the image looks during the
transition of dot sizes. See also Gray Scale and Line Screen.
Line Screen
The screen frequency, or the number of rows of halftone dots in an
inch. The line screen and printing resolution determine the levels of
gray that are produced in an image. The line screen is inversely
proportional to the levels of gray produced. If the resolution is held
constant, increasing the line screen decreases the levels of gray
possible in an image.
Linearization
The calibration of equipment to a linear standard so that the output
value (of color or gray tone) equals (matches) the input value.
Mirror Print
An image which is rotated horizontally 180˚. This produces a mirror
image of the original.
Myriad Film
XANTÉ’s new polyester based material, specifically designed to be
used with your PlateMaker or Accel-a-Writer printer and FilmStar.
This computer-to-film technology produces high quality positive and
negative film from your desktop, without the time and expense of
camera and darkroom procedures.
Myriad Plates
XANTÉ’s new polyester-based offset printing plate media
specifically designed for the PlateMaker II. Myriad plates go directly
from the printer to the press, eliminating many traditional print shop
steps, such as paste-up, negatives, halftone stripping and plate
burning.
G-12 Glossarybb __________________________________________

Negative Print
An image in which the white and black values are reversed.
NEIT
XANTÉ’s new Negative Enhanced Imaging Technology (NEIT).
This technology allows you to reduce the distortion of gray scale
images and the plugging (filling-in) of small white spaces that were
common when printing a negative image on a laser printer. See
Negative Print, Ghosting, and Plugging.
Network
Computer devices (Macintoshes, PCs, printers, etc.) that are linked
together by cables and are able to communicate with each other
using one of many network operating standards (such as AppleTalk
or Ethernet).
Null Modem Cable

A type of cable that allows serial communication between devices
without modems. It switches the transmit and receive data lines and
wiring handshake lines to simulate modem protocols.
Off Line
The printer or controller is not accepting data from the host
computer. The On Line key LED is not lit.
On Line
The printer or controller is ready to accept or is accepting data from
the host computer. The On Line key LED is lit. The printer or
controller has to be on line to accept and print a job.
Output
Computer generated information in its final form. For example,
printer output is a printed copy of the information. Monitor output is
the projected image of the data on screen.
Parallel
Interface technique which transmits several bits of data at the same
time through different wires. Parallel transmission is generally faster
than serial transmission. See Centronics Interface.
___________________________________________ Glossary G-13

Parameter
A value to be used for a job or by a system. For example, page
orientation is a job parameter that can be set to portrait or landscape;
flow control and parity are system parameters.
Parity
The addition of an extra bit to a packet of transmitted data to make
the total number of 1s either even or odd. A parity check is used in
serial communications to help identify data transmission errors, since
a loss of data is likely to change the parity of the packet.
PDF File
Printer Description File. A special file providing printer or controller
specific information which is needed by QuarkXPress so that it
works smoothly with the printer or controller.
Peripheral
A piece of equipment or device connected to a computer. For
example, printers, controllers, modems, and scanners are forms of
peripheral devices.
Persistent Parameters
Parameters which last even if the printer or controller is powered off.
Phosphor
A substance that glows when struck by radiation. Phosphors coat the
inside of such things as monitors, televisions, and fluorescent lamps.
Point Size
Term used to describe the size of a font. One point equals 1/72 of an
inch.
Port
A plug on a computer, printer, or controller through which data can
be sent or received. See Centronics interface and RS-232 Interface.
Portrait Orientation
A page format that is larger vertically than it is horizontally. The
term comes from painting when artists paint “portraits” on canvases
that are taller than they are wide. See also Landscape Orientation.
G-14 Glossarybb __________________________________________

PostScript
A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. XANTÉ
printers contain the Adobe Postscript language, not an emulation.
PPD File
PostScript Printer Description file. A file which provides software
applications access to printer or controller specific features. Options
set using the PPD override printer default settings made from the
front panel or through XANTÉ Command Center.
Print Density
The relative darkness or lightness of the print image on the page.
Depending upon the XANTÉ printer, density can be changed either
through the front panel, through a density dial, or through both.
Printer Control Language

A set of printer commands, imbedded as software in the printer’s
controller, which contains all the instructions needed by your printer
to describe page content and character and graphic placement.
Printer Driver
A file that enables the application program to communicate with the
printer or controller. Usually the printer driver is installed within an
application program.
Printer Margin
The imageable area of the printer (not the margin setting within an
application). The portion of a page to which a printer can apply toner
is the imageable area of that page.
Process Color
In the printing industry, the representation of full color by combining
three or more primary ink or pigment colors.
Protocol
A set of rules used to control how data is sent between devices.
___________________________________________ Glossary G-15

Queue
In the context of this manual, the print jobs on the controller’s hard
disk or RAM disk waiting to be printed.
RAM
Random Access Memory. RAM is volatile memory available to
programs and documents. Any information stored in RAM is lost
when the computer's power is turned off.
RAM Disk
A percentage of available RAM set aside to store data temporarily
for faster system access. Most XANTÉ printers allow you to specify
a RAM disk to store fonts.
Raster Image
An image composed of pixels or dots in a grid. See Bitmapped Image
and Vector Image.
Reboot
In the context of this manual, a command which sends a PostScript
file to the printer or controller directing it to reload the system
software.
Registration
Exact alignment of printing plates to print a crisp, clear, image. See
also X•ACT.
Resident Typefaces
Typefaces that are stored on the printer’s hard disk(s), RAM, or
ROM. Resident typefaces allow the printer to produce a print job
without accessing the host computer for typeface descriptions.
Resolution
A measure of the image detail produced by a device. Printer
resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi). Depending on the
model, XANTÉ printers feature from 600 x 600 dpi up to 1800 x
1800 dpi resolutions.
G-16 Glossarybb __________________________________________

RGB Color
A color system based on the mixture of red, blue, and green. See
Additive Color Theory.
RIP (Raster Image Processor)

The part of an output system that converts image data or page
description information into a bitmap format (by assigning each pixel
its on or off value).
RISC
Reduced Instruction Set Computer is a microprocessor architecture
that focuses on the efficient processing of a small, basic set of
instructions. XANTÉ printers and controllers feature RISC
processors.
ROM
Read Only Memory. ROM is permanent memory. Information in the
computer's ROM is retained even when the power is turned off.
Router
A device that connects two networks together. A router can connect
networks with different cable types. A router assigns a specific
address to each network and manages the traffic between these.
RS-232 Interface
A 9-pin or 25-pin interface which transmits data in serial mode. RS-
232 has five user-defined parameters: baud rate, data bits, parity,
stop bits, and protocol.
Screening
In the context of this manual, the various methods used to simulate
continuous tone images on a printer by varying the size, shape or
frequency of the dots printed on media.
___________________________________________ Glossary G-17

SCSI
Small Computer System Interface. Pronounced “SKUH-zee.”
XANTÉ printers feature a SCSI interface port through which you
can chain up to 6 external hard disks. The Accel-a-Graphix CT4 can
support multiple internal SCSI drives. See also SCSI Cable and SCSI
Cable Termination.
SCSI Cable
A cable which links two SCSI peripheral devices on a SCSI chain.
See also SCSI.
SCSI Cable Termination

A device which reduces interference on the SCSI chain by physically
terminating the line. See also SCSI.
Serial
Interface technique which sends one bit of information at a time,
sequentially, between computers and local peripheral devices such as
a printer or controller. Serial transmission is generally slower than
parallel transmission.
SIMM
Single In-Line Memory Module. A small, compact, circuit board
containing RAM (Random Access Memory) chips. See also RAM.
Spectrophotometer
A device that measures the light wavelengths reflected or transmitted
by an object. The measurements are plotted to create a spectral
curve. The curve is compared to a standard, such as a color matching
chart. The difference between the two curves is used to generate a
transfer curve.
Spooler
In XANTÉ printers, a device used to hold up to 250 processed jobs
processed by the controller, but not yet printed. The spooler is
usually set up on the SCSI drive of the controller or printer. It allows
the controller or host computer to continue processing jobs
independent of the printer’s status.
G-18 Glossarybb __________________________________________

Spot color
A single color assigned to a specific graphic or text image area and
printed without color separation.
Style
Defines a typeface in terms of weight, slant, and proportion.
Start-up Page
A setting on most XANTÉ printers that prints a page with basic
printer information such as name, page count, RAM size, and hard
disk setup.
Subtractive Color Theory

A color theory based on mixing specific quantities of three primary
colored inks or dyes on paper, or other media, to create all other
colors. The most common primary colors used are cyan, magenta,
and yellow. These colors absorb (subtract) the wavelengths of red
(cyan), green (magenta), and blue (yellow) from the white light
reflected by the paper. Because of the manufacturing limitations of
inks, however, a true black is not created from the combination of
the three primary colors. Black ink is used to overcome this
limitation. The primary subtractive colors are usually referred to as
CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black).
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. A set of protocols
designed to connect different types of networks.
Thinnet
A commonly used IEEE Ethernet cabling standard. Thinnet, or
10Base2, is a small diameter (.20 inches), 50-ohm coaxial cable.
Thinnet cables are used to create bus networks. See also 10Base2.
Tint
A single shade of color or gray such as 10% gray or 20% magenta.
Token Ring
A network that connects workstations in a closed ring and that uses
token passing to enable nodes to use the network.
___________________________________________ Glossary G-19

Toning (Toner Scatter)
When stray particles of toner appear on final output. Static electricity
causes extra stray toner particles to adhere to direct plate media
before printing.
Transfer Curve
Files which describe the difference between printer output and a
color standard. The transfer curves are used to adjust the printer
output for hardware, ink, and media anomalies to produce
predictable, standardized output.
Transmission Protocol
See Protocol.
Trapping
The process of slightly overlapping colors of adjoining images to
prevent a thin white line (misregistration) from appearing between
the images.
Typeface
A typeface is a set of characters. The characters in a typeface all have
three things in common: family, style, and character set. See also
Font, Family, and Character Set.
Unshielded Twisted-Pair Cable

A commonly used IEEE Ethernet cabling standard. UTP, or
10BaseT, consists of two insulated copper strands twisted about each
other to reduce outside interference of their signals. UTP cable,
which is used to create star networks, is relatively inexpensive, easy
to install, easy to modify, and may already exist in many installations
as part of the telephone network. See also 10BaseT.
Vector Image
An image composed of a mathematical description of lines, curves,
and geometric shapes. See Bitmapped Image and Raster Image.
G-20 Glossarybb __________________________________________

Vellum
A type of semitransparent media used in the printing industry to
replace more expensive film negatives. Vellum is used in screen
printing environments, such as in T-shirt printing. See also Myriad.
Volatile Parameters
Printer or controller parameters which only last during the current
power cycle of the printer. For example, the PostScript parameter
jobname specifies the name of the current printing job being
processed.
WPD File
Windows Printer Description file. A special file providing printer-
specific information which is needed by Windows applications so
that the applications work smoothly with a XANTÉ printer or
controller.
X•ACT (XANTÉ Accurate Calibration Technology)

XANTÉ technology that compensates for print engine variations so
you can print more precise horizontal and vertical dimensions. This
is critical when printing color separations and other jobs where
pinpoint accuracy is essential for registration. See also Registration.
X-HEIGHT
The height of a lower case letter without an ascender or descender in
a typeface.
X-Screening
XANTÉ’s method of using a dispersed dot screen, also referred to as
stochastic screening. It varies the distance between individual ink
dots in a seemingly random pattern. Areas with greater numbers of
dots appear darker while those with fewer dots appear lighter.
XON/XOFF
A software-controlled protocol which controls the flow of data in
serial communication. See also DTR/DSR.
◊◊◊
___________________________________________ Glossary G-21

G-22 Glossarybb __________________________________________
User Guide for PSPrinter 3-13
Index Utility files, Macintosh 3-20
Utility files, PC 4-29
Adobe PostScript 3 1-6, 1-8, 1-9
Fonts, Macintosh 3-4
Symbols Fonts, PC 4-4, 4-5
Smooth Shading 6-15
∆E G-3 Adobe PostScript Level 2
10Base2 cable G-3 Fonts, Macintosh 3-5
10BaseT cable G-3 Adobe Type Manager
1200 DPI menu Macintosh 3-4
Miscellaneous menu 5-16 PC 4-4, 4-5
AdobePS printer driver 3-10, 3-
A 14, 4-8, 4-16
Accel-a-Graphix folder 3-3 AG_CT4 folder 4-4
Accel-a-Writer, status message A-12 Air vent 9-4
Accurate Calibration Technology G- Aldus Drivers 3-3, 3-23
21. See X•ACT Align Paper, PC 4-35, 4-49
Acrobat folder 3-3, 4-4 AMD RISC processor 1-7, 1-8
Additive Color Theory G-3 APD, Macintosh 3-22
Adobe App Drivers folder 3-3, 3-22
Illustrator B-15 AppleTalk G-3
PageMaker B-8 AppleTalk, Macintosh 3-28
Separator B-15 Application notes B-3
Adobe Acrobat AutoCAD B-12
Installation, Macintosh 3-3, 3- FreeHand, Macintosh B-4
5, 3-9 FreeHand, PC B-4
Installation, PC 4-4, 4-5, 4-7 PageMaker, Macintosh B-8
Adobe Downloader 3-5, 3-30 PageMaker, PC B-8
Adobe PostScript QuarkXPress, Macintosh B-6
Download files, Macintosh 3- QuarkXPress, PC B-5
26, 3-30 ATM
Download files, PC 4-35 ATM 4.0.2 folder 3-4
Drivers, Macintosh 3-4, 3-5, 3- ATM folder 4-4
9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-14 ATM-J Upgrade folder 3-4
Drivers, PC 4-8 AutoCAD B-12
Drivers, Windows 3.1 4-4, 4-5, 4- Configuring B-12
8 Default printer B-15
Drivers, Windows 95 4-4, 4-5, 4- Printing from B-14
16 Resolution setting B-13
Drivers, Windows NT 4-4, 4-5, 4-
23
Manuals 1-6
_______________________________________________ Index I-1

B Selecting as source 7-9
Standard 1-9, 2-4
Banding A-20, A-22, G-4 Tray chaining 7-10
Baud rate 2-40, G-4 Tray Select key 7-9
RS232 menu 5-18 Using 7-8
Bitmapped image G-4 Catch up G-5
Bleed G-4 Cautions
Buffer G-4 Adhesives 7-3
Cleaning the printer 9-6
C Downloading fonts to RAM 3-
Cables 44, 4-51
Centronics parallel 2-38 Duplexer, lifting 2-17
During printer moves 9-4 Fuser unit 7-3
FCC Class A compliance v Inks 7-3
Parallel 2-38 Manual feed tray limit 2-34
SCSI disk 2-41 Media specifications 7-4
Serial 2-39 Monitor 2-24
Shielded required v Paper cassette limit 2-30
Troubleshooting A-14, A-15 Preprinted media 7-3
Calibration G-4 SCSI disk 2-41, 2-42
Halftone 1-8 Temperature 7-3
Halftone, Macintosh 3-36 Toner cartridge 2-24, A-9
Halftone, PC 4-43 CD-ROM, XANTÉ Utilities
Line length 1-8, 3-42, 4-49 PC 4-3
X•ACT 1-8, 3-40, 4-47 Centronics G-5
Cancel job Chaining 7-10
Reset key 5-6 Character spacing, Windows A-22
Reset to stop A-13 Chooser
Timeout 5-16 Auto setup 3-16
Capacity Falling off A-18, A-19
Labels 7-12 Manual setup 3-18
Manual feed tray 1-7, 2-32 Troubleshooting 2-38, A-15, A-
Paper Cassette 1-7, 2-11, 2-28 18, A-19
Transparencies 7-11 Version required 3-10
Cascade printing G-4 Class A compliance iv
Cassette Clean.ps 3-20, 4-29
Capacity 1-7, 2-11, 2-28, A-4 Cleaning 9-5
Domestic 7-8 Caution 9-6
International 2-28, 7-8 Cleaning solutions 9-6
Jam A-5 Solutions 2-3
Loading 2-30, 7-8 Clearance 2-3
North American 2-28 CMS G-5
Optional 1-9, 2-4 CMYK G-5
I-2 Indexbb ______________________________________________

Coaxial cable G-5 Default settings G-7
Colophon, manual vi Densitometer 1-9, G-7
Color gamut G-5, G-10 Macintosh 3-37
Color profile G-6 PC 4-44
Color Rendering Dictionary G-6 Density G-7
Color separation G-6 Adjusting 7-18, 8-6
Color space G-6 Front panel menu 5-11
Colorimeter G-6 Diagnostic tests 2-36, 5-3, 5-4
Command Center DIN-8 2-37
Macintosh 3-24 Display window 5-4
PC 4-31 Status messages A-12, A-16
Communications Troubleshooting A-16
Settings 5-8, A-15 Dot gain G-7
Troubleshooting A-15 Dots per inch G-7
Configuration Double-sided printing 7-14
PC Utilities 4-31 Download fonts
PPD, Macintosh 3-16, 3-18 Macintosh 3-30
PPD, Windows 95 4-20 PC 4-51
PPD, Windows NT 4-23 Download PostScript file
Printer 3-19, 4-28 Macintosh 3-26, 3-30
Printer, Macintosh 3-4 PC 4-35
Printer, PC 3-20, 4-4, 4-29 Downloads folder 3-4, 3-20
Configuration menu structure 5-8 DPI G-7
Consumables, effect on Warrenty 9- Front panel menu 5-12
12 Line art 8-4
Control-D, end-of-job 4-29, 4-35 Drift G-7
Copyright iv Driver G-15
CorelDRAW B-12 Drivers
CRD G-6 Adobe PSPrinter, Macintosh 3-11
CRD Directories, Macintosh 3-29 AdobePS, Macintosh 3-14
CRD Directory, PC 4-35 AdobePS, Windows 3.1 4-8
CT4_cal.ps 3-20, 4-29 AdobePS, Windows 95 4-16
Custom size 2-32, 7-9 PageMaker B-8
Customer support A-24 Windows 3.1, deleting 4-15
Bulletin board number A-26 XANTÉ PPDs, Macintosh 3-4, 3-5
Fax number A-26 XANTÉ PPDs, PC 4-4, 4-8
Phone number A-25 Drivers folder 4-4
DTR/DSR 2-40, G-6, G-8
D Duplexer 1-7, 1-9, 2-4, 2-14
D.ps 4-29 Duplex key 5-7
Data bits 2-40 Duplex LED 5-4
Data Bits menu, RS232 5-18 Installing 2-15
Data LED 5-4 Jams A-9
_______________________________________________ Index I-3

Latches, warning 2-18 EtherTalk 2-9, 5-20, G-8
Lifting, warning 2-17 Enable menu 5-20
PPD option 6-10 Mode menu 5-20
Duplexing 7-15 Setting the zone name, Macintosh
Edge style 7-16 3-21, 3-28
Recycled paper 7-15 Setting the zone name, PC 4-30
Selecting media 7-15 Spool menu 5-20
Tumble style 7-16 Extra wide print upgrade 2-10
E F
Enable menu Factory default G-8
EtherTalk menu 5-20 Factory defaults
LocalTalk menu 5-20 Baud Rate menu, RS232 5-18
LPR menu 5-20 Data Bits menu, RS232 5-18
Novell PServer menu 5-21 Density menu 5-11
Parallel 5-19 DPI menu 5-12
RS232 5-18 Enable menu, EtherTalk 5-20
End-of-file marker 4-29, 4-35, A-15 Enable menu, LocalTalk 5-20
Engine Enable menu, LPR 5-20
Error 5-4 Enable menu, Novell PServer 5-21
Service E, service message A-14 Enable menu, Parallel 5-19
Speed 1-8 Enable menu, RS232 5-18
Enhanced Screening Technology 1- EtherTalk menu 5-20
8, 8-9, G-8 Flow Control menu, RS232 5-18
PPD option 6-10 Font Accel menu 5-15
Enter key 5-6 Gamma menu 5-12
Envelopes Initial Job menu 5-12
Feeder source 7-8, 7-9 Jam Recover menu 5-13
Formatting 7-12 Language menu 5-13
Manual feed tray 7-9 LocalTalk menu 5-20
Printing 7-12 LPR menu 5-20
Printing tips 7-12 Manual Feed menu 5-13
To avoid 7-4 Mode menu, EtherTalk 5-20
Environmental requirements 2-3 Mode menu, LocalTalk 5-20
EP-Cart, status message A-12 Mode menu, LPR 5-20
EPS, scanned images 8-5 Mode menu, Novell PServer 5-21
Error diffusion G-8 Mode menu, parallel 5-19
EtherHelp 3-4 Mode menu, RS232 5-18
Ethernet 1-8, G-8 NEIT menu 5-14
Cabling A-15 Novell PServer menu 5-21
Port 2-36 Parallel menu 5-19
Troubleshooting A-14, A-15 Parity menu, RS232 5-18
Upgrade 2-9 Protocol menu, Novell PServer 5-
21
I-4 Indexbb ______________________________________________
RAM Disk menu 5-14 FilmStar G-9
Resetting 5-10 FilmStar 2 1-7
RS232 menu 5-17 First job, status message 5-3, A-12
Screen menu 5-15 Flow control 2-40, G-9
Spool menu, EtherTalk 5-20 RS232 menu 5-18
Spool menu, LocalTalk 5-20 Font G-9
Spool menu, LPR 5-20 Font Accel menu
Spool menu, Novell PServer 5-21 Miscellaneous menu 5-15
Spool menu, Parallel 5-19 Font Accelerator 1-9, 8-9, G-9
Spool menu, RS232 5-19 Front panel menu 5-15
Startup Page menu 5-15 Font downloading
Stop Bits menu, RS232 5-19 Memory 2-11
Timeout menu 5-16 Fonts
Timeout menu, Novell PServer 5- Adobe PostScript 1-9, 9-7
22 Adobe PostScript 3, Macintosh 3-4
Toner Page menu 5-15 Adobe PostScript 3, PC 4-4, 4-5
Tray Switch menu 5-16 Adobe PostScript Level 2,
Fast Imaging Macintosh 3-5
PPD option 6-11 Download, Macintosh 3-30
Fax, phone number A-26 Downloading, caution 3-44, 4-51
FCC compliance iv Printer 1-9
Features Printer, Macintosh 3-44
AMD RISC processor 1-7, 1-8 Printer, PC 4-51
Densitometer support 1-9 Storage 2-41
Font Accelerator 1-9 Update PPD, PC 4-35
Image shift 1-9, 6-12 Form Feed key 5-5
Mirror Print 1-9, 6-12 Form Feed LED 5-5
Negative Print 1-9, 6-13 Formats, scanned images 8-5
NEIT 2-10 Formula, levels of gray 8-3
Printer 1-6, 1-8 FreeHand B-4
RAM 1-9 APD, Macintosh 3-22
Resolution 1-6, 1-8 Application notes B-4
Spooling 1-9, 6-15 Drivers, Macintosh 3-3
XANTÉ Enhanced Screening PPD, Macintosh 3-23
Technology 1-8, 6-10 Front panel
XANTÉ Halftone Calibration Configuration menus 5-8
Technology 1-8, 6-11 Diagnostic tests 5-4
XANTÉ X•ACT 1-8 Keys 5-5
FIFO G-9 LEDs 5-4
File server G-9 Printer status 5-4
Film Tray Select key 7-9
Printing 7-10 Front panel keys
Selecting 7-3 Duplex key 5-7
XANTÉ Myriad Film 1-7 Enter key 5-6
_______________________________________________ Index I-5

Form Feed key 5-5 Custom gamma curve, PC 4-46
Menu key 5-6 PPD option 6-11
On Line key 5-5 Halftones
Reset key 5-6 Resolution 8-5
Test key 5-6 Scanning 8-5
Tray Select key 5-7 Handling the printer 9-3
Front panel LEDs Handshaking G-6, G-11
Data LED 5-4 Hard disk G-11
Duplex LED 5-4 Caution 2-24, 2-41, 2-42
Form Feed LED 5-5 External, connecting 2-41
Manual LED 5-4 Font capacity 2-41
On Line LED 5-4 Identifying 2-41
Printer icon LEDs 5-5 Initializing 2-43
Ready LED 2-35, 5-4 Initializing, Macintosh 3-20
Ftp.ps 3-20, 4-29 Initializing, PC 4-30
Fuser unit Start-up page 2-36
Service A, service message A-14 Holdout G-11
Warming up, status message A-14 Horizontal Image Shift 1-9
PPD option 6-12
G Humidity 2-3
Gamma 1-8 I
Correction 8-6, G-10
Curve G-9 IDE G-11
Custom gamma curve, Macintosh IEEE G-11
3-39 Imageable area G-11
Custom gamma curve, PC 4-46 Oversize 7-7, 7-13
Front panel menu 5-12 InitdskX.ps 3-20, 4-30
PPD option 6-11 Initial Job menu 5-12
Gamut G-5, G-10 Initializing a hard disk
Gateway G-10 Macintosh 3-20
Ghosting G-10 PC 4-30
Graphics Initializing, status message 5-3, A-12
Memory 2-11 Installation
Gray, level of 8-3 Aldus FreeHand PPD, Macintosh
Formula 8-3 3-23
Grayscale G-10 Aldus PageMaker PPD, Macintosh
3-23
H APD, Macintosh 3-22
Halftone G-10 Macintosh Utilities 3-5
Halftone Calibration Technology 1- PageMaker PPD, PC 4-6
8, 8-6 Paper feeder 2-12
Custom gamma curve, Macintosh PC Utilities 4-5, 4-6
3-39 PPD, Macintosh 3-11, 3-15
I-6 Indexbb ______________________________________________

PPD, Windows 3.1 4-10 Output tray 9-4, A-7
PPD, Windows 95 4-16 Overloading 2-30, 2-34
PPD, Windows NT 4-23 Paper path A-5
Printer drivers, Macintosh 3-11, 3- Preventing A-3
14 Recovery, automatic A-8
Printer drivers, Windows 3.1 4-8
Printer drivers, Windows 95 4-16 K
Printer drivers, Windows NT 4-23 Keys 5-5
QuarkXPress PDF, Macintosh 3-23 Duplex key 5-7
QuarkXPress PDF, PC 4-6, 4-28 Enter key 5-6
SCSI disk, external 2-41 Form Feed key 5-5
Toner Cartridge 2-24 Menu key 5-6
XANTÉ Utilities, Macintosh 3-5 On Line key 5-5
XANTÉ Utilities, PC 4-5 Reset key 5-6
Instread.txt 4-5 Test key 5-6
Interfaces Tray Select key 5-7, 7-9
Ethernet 1-7, 1-8, 2-9, 2-36
Illustration of 2-36 L
LocalTalk 1-7, 1-8, 2-36, 2-37
Parallel 1-7, 1-8, 2-36, 2-38 Labels
SCSI 1-8, 2-36, 2-41 Adhesives 7-4
Selecting 2-36 Feeder source 7-8
Serial 1-7, 1-8, 2-36, 2-38 Formatting 7-13
Interfaces menu 5-10, 5-17 Jams 7-12
EtherTalk menu 5-20 Printing 7-12
Illustration of 5-17 Printing tips 7-12
LocalTalk menu 5-20 Selecting 7-3
LPR menu 5-20 Storage 7-4
Novell PServer menu 5-21 To avoid 7-4
Parallel menu 5-19 Landscape G-12
RS232 menu 5-17 Language menu 5-13
Internal hard disk upgrade 2-10 Factory default 5-13
Internet support 1-6, A-26 Laser beam, warning iv
LaserWriter driver A-15, A-18
J LEDs 5-3
Data LED 5-4
Jam Recover menu 5-13, A-8 Duplex LED 5-4
Jams A-3 Form Feed LED 5-5
Cassettes A-5 Manual LED 5-4
Clearing A-4 On Line LED 5-4
Fanning 7-12 Printer Icon LED 5-5
Front cover, opening 9-3 Ready LED 2-35, 5-4
Labels 7-12 Troubleshooting A-17
Legal size A-18
_______________________________________________ Index I-7

Legal size, troubleshooting A-17, A- Standard procedures 3-3
18 Troubleshooting A-15
Letterhead, Caution 7-3 Macintosh Utilities
Levels of gray G-12 App Drivers folder 3-22
lpi 8-4 Downloader 3-30
Printer resolution 8-4 Downloads folder 3-20
Lifting the printer 9-4 Installation 3-5
Line art scanning 8-4 Mac Watermark plug-in 3-13
Line Screen G-12 XANTÉ Command Center 3-24
Line screen, level of gray 8-3, 8-4 XANTÉ Linearizer 3-29, 3-38
Linearization G-12 Magnet, caution 2-24
Linearization Tool, PC 4-38, 4-45 Main menus
Linearize Interfaces menu 5-10
Macintosh 3-29, 3-36 Miscellaneous menu 5-10
PC 4-36, 4-43 Maintenance
Linearizer, Macintosh 3-29, 3-38 Cleaners 9-6
LocalHelp 3-4 Cleaning the printer 2-3, 9-5
LocalTalk 5-20 Manual
Enable menu 5-20 User Guide for Adobe PSPrinter
Mode menu 5-20 Driver 8.3 3-13
Network 2-38 XANTÉ PDFs 3-4, 4-4
Port 2-36, 2-37 Manual feed tray
Spool menu 5-20 Capacity 1-7, 2-32, 7-9, A-4
lpi Double-sided printing 7-14
Levels of gray 8-3 Envelopes 7-8, 7-9
QuarkXPress B-7 Film 7-10
LPR 5-20 Front panel menu 5-13
Enable menu 5-20 Labels 7-8, 7-9, 7-12
Mode menu 5-20 Loading 2-32
Spool menu 5-20 Manual feed 7-9
TCP/IP menu, Macintosh 3-28 Manual LED 5-4
TCP/IP menu, PC 4-35 Media size 1-8
Media sizes 5-13
M Odd size media 7-9
Mac Watermark plug-in 3-13 Over size media 7-9
Macintosh Preparing media 2-34
Adobe Acrobat 3-9 Regular feed 7-9
Adobe PostScript driver 3-4, 3- Selecting as source 2-35
5, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-14 Transparencies 7-8, 7-9, 7-11
Configuring RAM in PPD 6-14 Tray Select key 2-35
Connecting to 2-37 Upper limit mark 2-34
PPD 3-11, 3-15, 3-16, 3-18 Using 7-9
Selecting PPD options 6-4 Manual LED 5-4
I-8 Indexbb ______________________________________________

Manuals Lower numeric values 5-6
Adobe PostScript manuals 1-6 Main menus 5-10
Conventions 1-5 Miscellaneous menu 5-10
Copyright iv Raise numeric values 5-6
Notice iii Scroll through options 5-6
Overview 1-4 Selecting 5-6
Safety Information iv Mirror Print 1-9, G-12
User's guide 1-4, 2-4 PPD option 6-12
Manuals folder 4-4 Miscellaneous menu 5-10
Margin Adjustment, Macintosh 3- 1200 DPI menu 5-16
25, 3-42 Density menu 5-11
Media DPI menu 5-12
Caution, specifications 7-4 Font Accel menu 5-15
Caution, temperature 7-3 Gamma menu 5-12
Coated 7-4 Illustration of 5-11
Curl 7-4 Initial Job menu 5-12
Embossed 7-4 Jam Recover menu 5-13
Envelopes 7-12 Language menu 5-13
Feeder source 7-8 Manual Feed menu 5-13
Film 7-10 NEIT menu 5-14
Guidelines 7-4 RAM Disk menu 5-14
Jams 2-30, 2-34, A-3 Screen menu 5-15
Manual LED 5-4 Startup Page menu 5-15
Perforated 7-4 Timeout menu 5-16
Preparing 2-30 Toner Page menu 5-15
Preprinted 7-3 Tray Switch menu 5-16
Printing side A-4 Mode menu
Selecting 7-3, 7-4 EtherTalk menu 5-20
Sizes 1-8, 2-28, 2-32 LocalTalk menu 5-20
Source 7-9 LPR menu 5-20
Storage 7-3, 7-4 Novell PServer menu 5-21
Temperature requirements 7-3 Parallel menu 5-19
Textured 7-4 RS232 5-18
To avoid 7-4 Monitor, caution 2-24
Transparencies 7-11 Moving the printer 9-4
Memory MultiAd Creator B-16
Resolutions 2-11 Myriad film 1-7, G-12
Upgrades 1-9, 2-11 Selecting 7-3
Menu key 5-6 Static 7-11
Raise numeric values 5-6 Myriad plates G-12
Scroll through options 5-6 To order 7-7
Menus
Backing out of 5-6
Interfaces menu 5-10, 5-17
_______________________________________________ Index I-9

N Enable menu, EtherTalk 5-20
Enable menu, LocalTalk 5-20
Negative Enhanced Imaging Technol- Enable menu, LPR 5-20
ogy G-13. See also NEIT Enable menu, Novell PServer 5-21
Negative image 8-6 Enable menu, Parallel 5-19
Negative Print 1-9, G-13 Enable menu, RS232 5-18
PPD option 6-13 Ethernet 1-8, 2-9
NEIT 1-9, 5-14, 8-8, G-13 Extra Wide Print 1-8
Miscellaneous menu 5-14 Flow Control menu, RS232 5-18
Upgrade 2-10 Internal IDE hard disk 1-8
NetPeeks folder 3-4 Lowercase 5-9
Network G-13 Memory upgrades 1-9, 2-11
Ethernet 2-36 Mode menu, EtherTalk 5-20
LocalTalk 2-38 Mode menu, LocalTalk 5-20
Networking Mode menu, LPR 5-20
XANTÉ Command Center, Mode menu, Novell PServer 5-21
Macintosh 3-27 Mode menu, parallel 5-19
XANTÉ Command Center, PC 4- Mode menu, RS232 5-18
36 Paper cassette 1-7, 1-9, 2-4, 2-11
No EP-Cart, status message A-12 Paper feeder 1-7, 1-9, 2-4, 2-
Novell Print Server 1-8, 2-9 11, 2-12
Macintosh 3-27 Parity menu, RS232 5-18
PC 4-36 Protocol menu, Novell PServer 5-
Novell PServer menu 5-21 21
Enable menu 5-21 Selecting 5-6
Mode menu 5-21 SIMMs 2-11
Protocol menu 5-21 Spool menu, EtherTalk 5-20
Spool menu 5-21 Spool menu, LocalTalk 5-20
Timeout menu 5-22 Spool menu, LPR 5-20
Novell.ps 3-21, 4-30 Spool menu, Novell PServer 5-21
Null modem cable G-13 Spool menu, Parallel 5-19
Spool menu, RS232 5-19
O Stop Bits menu, RS232 5-19
Odd size media Timeout menu, Novell PServer 5-
Fold down tray 7-9 22
Off line, status message A-12 XANTÉ NEIT 1-9
On Line key 5-5 Orientation
On Line LED 5-4 Page design B-19
Options 2-9 Output tray, jams A-7
Baud Rate menu, RS232 5-18 Oversize printing
Capitalized 5-9 Imageable area 7-7, 7-13
Data Bits menu, RS232 5-18 Manual feed tray 7-9
Duplexer 1-7, 1-9, 2-4, 2-14, 6-
10
I-10 Indexbb ______________________________________________

Overview Loading 2-30, 7-8
Back of printer 2-8 North American 2-28
Front of printer 2-7 Optional 1-9, 2-4
Ozone iv Paper feeder 2-12, 7-9
Preparing media 2-30
P Selecting as source 7-9
Page count 2-36 Standard 1-9, 2-4
Page design B-16 Tray Select key 7-9
Orientation B-19 Upper limit mark 2-30
Pitch B-20 Using 7-8
Point size B-21 Paper feeder 1-7, 1-9, 2-4, 2-11, 2-
Spacing B-22 12
Tips B-22 Installing 2-12
x-Height B-21 Optional cassette 2-12
PageMaker Printer Icon LED 5-5
APD, Macintosh 3-22 Tray chaining 7-10
Application notes B-8 Using 2-12, 7-9
Drivers, Macintosh 3-3 Paper guides 2-32, 2-34
Line screen 8-5 Paper handling 2-28, 2-32
Macintosh B-8 Options 2-11
PPD, Macintosh 3-23 Paper jam, status message A-12
PPD, PC 4-6 Paper out, status message A-13
Scanned images 8-5 Paper path 7-11
Paper Clearing jams A-5
Coated 7-4 Illustration of A-5
Curl 7-4 Parallel 5-19, G-13
Feeder source 7-8, 7-9 Cable 2-38
Jams 2-30, 2-34 Enable menu 5-19
Letterhead 7-3 Mode menu 5-19
Manual feed tray 7-9 Port 2-36, 2-38
Perforated 7-4 Spool menu 5-19
Preparing 2-30 When to use 2-38
Preprinted 7-3 Parity 2-40, 2-41, G-14
Printing side A-4 RS232 menu 5-18
Selecting 7-3 Parmdump.ps 3-21, 4-30
Sizes 1-8 PC
Storage 7-4 Adobe Acrobat 4-7
To avoid 7-4 Adobe PostScript driver 4-8, 4-16
Paper cassette 1-7 Connecting to 2-38
Adding a second 2-12, 7-9 PPD 4-10, 4-16, 4-20, 4-23
Capacity 1-7, 2-11, 2-28 Standard procedures 4-3
Domestic 7-8
International 2-28, 7-8
_______________________________________________ Index I-11

Troubleshooting A-15 Power switch 2-35
XANTÉ Command Center require- Power up 5-3
ments 4-31 PPD G-15
XANTÉ Utilities 4-3 Aldus FreeHand, Macintosh 3-23
PC Utilities Aldus PageMaker, Macintosh 3-23
Configuration 4-31 Configuring RAM 6-14
Installation 4-5, 4-6 Duplex menu 6-10
PDFs folder 4-28 Enhanced Screen menu 6-10
PS_Files folder 4-29 Fast Imaging menu 6-11
XANTÉ Command Center 4-31 Features 6-9
XANTÉ Linearization Tool 4- Gamma menu 6-11
38, 4-45 Horizontal Image Shift menu 6-12
PDF G-14 Macintosh 3-11, 3-15, 3-16, 3-18
QuarkXPress, Macintosh 3-23 Mirror Print menu 6-12
QuarkXPress, PC 4-6, 4-28 Negative Print menu 6-13
PDFs folder 4-4, 4-28 PageMaker, PC 4-6
Phone numbers Resolution menu 6-14
Bulletin board A-26 Save Spooled Job menu 6-15
Fax A-26 Selecting features, Macintosh 6-4
Technical support A-25 Selecting features, Windows 3.1 6-
PhoneNET 2-37 8
Phosphor G-14 Selecting features, Windows 95 6-6
PICT, scanned images 8-5 Selecting printer features 6-3
Pitch B-20 Smooth Shading menu 6-15
Point size B-21, G-14 Tray Switch menu 6-16
Port G-14 Using 6-3
Portrait G-14 Vertical Image Shift menu 6-12
Ports Windows 3.1 4-10
Ethernet 2-36 Windows 95 4-16, 4-20
Illustration of 2-36 Windows NT 4-23
LocalTalk 2-37 PPDs folder 4-4
Parallel 2-38 Preprinted media 7-3
SCSI 2-41 Print density
Selecting 2-36 Adjusting 8-6
Serial 2-38 Print quality 6-11
PostScript G-15 Banding A-20, A-22
Resident fonts 1-8, 9-7 Character spacing A-22
Typefaces 1-9 Gray, levels of 8-3
PostScript 3 Fonts folder 3-4 Large vertical dots A-21
Power Light images A-19, A-20
Source A-14 Line screens 8-3
Power cord 2-4, 2-35, 2-36 Marks, vertical and horizontal A-
During printer moves 9-4 22
Power fluctuations 2-35
I-12 Indexbb ______________________________________________

Scanner resolutions 8-3, 8-4 PPD, Windows 3.1 4-10
Troubleshooting A-19 PPD, Windows 95 4-16, 4-20
Variables 7-3 PPD, Windows NT 4-23
White lines A-21 Printer information, Macintosh 3-
Windows A-22 25
Print resolution upgrade 1-6, 1-8, 2- Printer information, PC 4-34
10 Printer status, Macintosh 3-25
Printer Printer status, PC 4-35
Adjusting line lengths, Macintosh Rear overview 2-8
3-26, 3-40 Restart, Macintosh 3-26
Adjusting line lengths, PC 4-37, 4- Restart, PC 4-35
47 Service messages A-14
Adjusting margins, Macintosh 3- Setup 5-8, 6-3
25, 3-42 Spooling, front panel 3-32, 4-39
Adjusting margins, PC 4-35, 4-49 Spooling, Macintosh 3-25, 3-32
Calibrate, Macintosh 3-29, 3-36 Spooling, PC 4-36, 4-39
Calibrate, PC 4-36, 4-43 Start-up page, Macintosh 3-21, 3-
Cleaning 2-3, 9-5 26
Configuration, Macintosh 3-4, 3- Start-up page, PC 4-30, 4-31
19, 3-20 Starting 2-35
Configuration, PC 4-4, 4-28, 4-29 Status messages A-12
Diagnostic tests 2-36 System parameters, Macintosh 3-
Download Adobe PostScript files, 21
Macintosh 3-26, 3-30 System parameters, PC 4-30, 4-31
Download Adobe PostScript files, Toner cartridge, warning 2-24
PC 4-35 Unpacking 2-5
Download fonts, Macintosh 3-30 Weight 2-3
Driver, Macintosh 3-11, 3-14 Weight, warning 2-5, 2-12, 2-
Driver, Windows 95 4-16 17, 2-19, 2-23
Engine speed 1-8 Printer drivers G-15
Features 1-6 FreeHand B-4
Fonts, Macintosh 3-44 Macintosh 3-4, 3-5, 3-9, 3-10, 3-
Fonts, PC 4-51 11, 3-14, 3-22, B-4
Front overview 2-7 PageMaker B-8
Lifting 9-3, 9-4 PC 4-8, 4-28
Location 2-3 Separator B-15
Modifications, warning iv Windows 3.1 4-4, 4-5, 4-8, 4-15
Moving 9-4 Windows 95 4-4, 4-5, 4-16
Moving, caution 2-24 Windows NT 4-4, 4-5, 4-23
Name 2-36 Printer Drivers folder 3-4
PPD 6-3 Printer Icon LEDs 5-5
PPD, Macintosh 3-11, 3-15, 3- Manual LED 5-4, 5-5
16, 3-18 Tray Select key 5-5, 5-7
Printer margin G-15
_______________________________________________ Index I-13

Printer margins PS_Files folder 4-4, 4-29
Adjusting, Macintosh 3-25 PSPrinter printer driver 3-9, 3-11
Adjusting, PC 4-35
Definition 3-25, 4-35 Q
Printer open, status message A-13 QuarkXPress 1-10, 8-6, B-5, B-6
Printing Application notes B-5
Adobe PostScript User Guide 3-13 Line screen 8-6
Custom size 7-13 PDF, Macintosh 3-3, 3-5, 3-23
Double-sided copy 7-14 PDF, PC 4-4, 4-6, 4-28
Envelopes 7-12 Resolution B-7
Full-bleed 1-8 Scanned images 8-6
Labels 7-12 Screen frequency B-7
System Parameters, Macintosh 3- Queue G-16
21
System Parameters, PC 4-30, 4-31 R
Tips, envelopes 7-12
Tips, film 7-10 RAM G-16
Tips, labels 7-12 Configuring PPD, Macintosh 6-14
Tips, preventing jams A-3 Configuring PPD, Windows 3.1 6-14
Tips, transparencies 7-11 Configuring PPD, Windows 95 6-14
Procedures 3-31, 4-39 Start-up page 2-36
Custom gamma curve, Macintosh Upgrades 1-9, 2-11
3-39 RAM disk 8-9, G-16
Custom gamma curve, PC 4-46 Miscellaneous menu 5-14
Linearize, Macintosh 3-36 Raster image G-16
Linearize, PC 4-43 Read1st.txt 3-5, 4-5
Printer margin adjustment, Readme file
Macintosh 3-42 Adobe PostScript User Guide 3-13
Printer margin adjustment, PC 4-49 Readme.pdf 3-5, 4-5
Spooling, Macintosh 3-32 Ready idle, status message 5-3, A-13
Spooling, PC 4-39 Ready LED 2-35, 5-4
X•ACT Calibration, Macintosh 3- Ready printing, status message A-13
40 Reboot Printer
X•ACT Calibration, PC 4-47 Macintosh 3-26
Process color G-15 PC 4-35
Processing, status message A-13 Registration G-16
Processor 1-7, 1-8 Release latch 2-5
Product Manuals folder 3-4 Reset 1, status message A-13
Product registration 1-10 Reset key 5-6
Protocol G-15 Back out of menus 5-6
EtherTalk 2-9 Cancel jobs 5-6
Novell Print Server 2-9 Reset to stop, status message A-13
Novell PServer menu 5-21 Resetting job, status message A-13
TCP/IP 2-9
I-14 Indexbb ______________________________________________

Resident Fonts 1-8, 9-7 PPD Configuration, Macintosh 3-
Resolution 1-6, 2-10, G-16 16
AutoCAD B-13 PPD option 6-15
Changing, example 5-9 Use 3-34, 4-41
DPI menu 5-12 Scanner
Factory default 5-12 Formats 8-5
Levels of gray 8-3, 8-4 Halftones 8-5
Memory requirements 1-7, 2-11 Line art 8-4
PPD option 6-14 Resolution 8-4
QuarkXPress B-7 Screen angle, QuarkXPress B-7
Scanner 8-4 Screen Fonts folder 3-5
Standard 1-8 Screen menu
Start-up page 2-36 Miscellaneous menu 5-15
Upgrade 1-6, 1-8, 2-10 SCSI G-18
RGB G-17 SCSI disk
RIP G-17 Cable 2-41
RISC G-17 Caution 2-41, 2-42
RJ-ll 2-37 During printer moves 9-4
ROM G-17 External, connecting 2-41
Router G-17 Font capacity 2-41
RS-232 G-17 Identifying 2-41
RS232 menu 5-17 Initializing 2-43
Baud Rate menu 5-18 Port 1-8, 2-36, 2-41
Data Bits menu 5-18 Separations G-6
Enable menu 5-18 Serial G-18
Flow Control menu 5-18 Cable 2-39
Mode menu 5-18 Port 2-36, 2-38, 2-39
Parity menu 5-18 When to use 2-38
Spool menu 5-19 Service
Stop Bits menu 5-19 Making a service call A-24
Messages A-14
S Service A message A-14
Safety Service B message A-14
Duplexer latches 2-18 Service E message A-14
Information iv Set_IP.ps 3-21, 4-30
Laser beam iv Setup menu
Ozone iv Interfaces menu 5-10, 5-17
Printer modifications iv Miscellaneous menu 5-10
Printer weight 2-5, 2-12, 2-17, 2- Setzone.ps 3-21, 4-30
19, 2-23 Shipment
Toner cartridge 2-24 Contents 2-4
Save Spooled Job Damaged or incomplete 2-4
PPD Configuration, PC 4-11, 4-20 Optional items 2-4
_______________________________________________ Index I-15

SIMM 2-11, G-18 Paper out A-13
Simultaneous interfacing 1-7, 1-8 Power up 5-3
Smooth Shading Printer open A-13
PPD option 6-15 Processing A-13
Software, proprietary iv Ready idle 5-3, A-13
Spacing, character B-22 Ready printing A-13
Spectrophotometer G-18 Reset 1 A-13
Spool menu Reset to stop A-13
EtherTalk menu 5-20 Resetting job A-13
LocalTalk menu 5-20 Test print A-13
LPR menu 5-20 Toner low A-14
Novell PServer menu 5-21 Waiting A-14
Parallel menu 5-19 Warming up A-14
RS232 menu 5-19 Stop Bits menu, RS232 5-19
Spooler G-18 Subtractive Color Theory G-19
Spooling 1-9 Surge Protector 2-35
Front panel 3-32, 4-39 Sys/Start file A-12
Job status 3-35, 4-42 Executing 5-12
Macintosh 3-25, 3-32 Sysparm.ps 3-21, 4-31
PC 4-36, 4-39
PPD option 6-15 T
Spot color G-19 TCP/IP 1-8, 2-9, 3-21, 4-30, G-19
Start-up page 2-36, G-19 Macintosh 3-28
Command Center menu, Macintosh PC 4-35
3-26 Technical support A-24
Macintosh Utilities 3-21 Bulletin board number A-26
Miscellaneous menu 5-15 Fax number A-26
PC Utilities 4-30, 4-31 Internet 1-6, A-26
Printing 2-36 Phone number A-25
Test key 5-6 Web page 1-6, A-26
Test print status message A-13 Temperature
Troubleshooting A-16 Printer environment 2-3
Startpg.off 3-21, 4-30 Warming up, status message A-14
Startpg.on 3-21, 4-31 Terminating resistors 2-37, A-15
Static charge eliminator Test Directory
Cleaning 2-25 Macintosh 3-26
Illustration of 2-25 PC 4-37
Status messages A-12 Test key 5-6
Accel-a-Writer A-12 Lower numeric values 5-6
First job 5-3, A-12 Scroll through options 5-6
Initializing 5-3, A-12 Test print, status message A-13
Off line A-12 Thinnet cable G-19
Paper jam A-12
I-16 Indexbb ______________________________________________

TIFF Fanning 7-12
PageMaker 8-5 Feeder source 7-8, 7-9
QuarkXPress 8-6 Fold down tray 7-9
Scanned images 8-5 Jams 7-12
Timeout menu 5-16 Printing 7-11
Novell PServer menu 5-22 Selecting 7-3
Tint G-19 Storage 7-4
Token Ring G-19 To avoid 7-4
Toner Trapping G-20
Low, status message A-14 Tray chaining 7-10
Redistribute 7-18 PPD option 6-16
Settling 7-17 Tray Select key 5-7
Toner cartridge Tray Select key 5-7, 7-9
Caution 2-24, A-9 Manual feed tray 2-35
Disposal 2-24 Paper cassette 7-9
During printer moves 9-4 Printer Icon LEDs 5-5, 5-7
Extra wide 2-4 Tray Switch
Handling 7-17 Miscellaneous menu 5-16
Installing 2-4, 2-24 PPD option 6-16
Life of 7-17 Trays
Magnet 2-24 Chaining 5-7
No EP-Cart A-12 Selecting 5-7
Redistribute toner 2-26 Troubleshooting
Refilled A-4 Banding A-20, A-22
Replacing 7-17 Cables A-14
Sealing tape 2-27 Cannot print A-17
Standard size 2-4 Cassette A-16
Storage 7-17 Character spacing A-22
Tips on handling 7-17 Chooser A-15, A-18, A-19
Troubleshooting A-16 Communications, PC A-15
Warning 2-24 Display window A-16
Toner Page menu End-of-job marker A-15
Miscellaneous menu 5-15 Envelopes 7-12
Toning G-20 Ethernet A-14
Top cover, opening 2-5 Fold down tray A-16
Trademarks ii General checkup A-14
Transfer curve G-20 Jams A-3, A-18
Macintosh 3-29 Labels 7-12
PC 4-37 Large vertical dots A-21
Transfer Guide LaserWriter driver A-18
Cleaning 2-26 LEDs A-17
Illustration of 2-26 Legal size printing A-17, A-18
Transmission protocol G-20 Light image A-19, A-20
Transparencies
_______________________________________________ Index I-17

Macintosh A-14, A-15 XANTÉ Command Center 4-31
Media source A-16 XANTÉ Linearization Tool 4-
Miscellaneous A-16 38, 4-45
PC A-14, A-15 UTP cable G-20
Power cord 2-36, A-14
Power source A-14 V
Preliminary A-14 Vector image G-20
Print quality A-19 Vellum G-21
Safety information iv Vertical Image Shift 1-9
Start-up page A-16 PPD option 6-12
Status messages A-12, A-16
Technical support A-24 W
Terminating resistors 2-38, A-15
Toner cartridge 7-17, A-16 Waiting, status message A-14
White lines A-21 Warming up
Windows A-22 Status message A-14
Typefaces Warnings
Adobe PostScript 3 1-9 Duplexer latches 2-18
Miscellaneous B-17 Laser beam iv
Resident 1-9 Ozone iv
Sans serif B-17 Printer modifications iv
Serif B-17 Printer weight 2-5, 2-12, 2-17, 2-
19, 2-23
U Toner cartridge 2-24
Warranty 1-10
Unshielded twisted-pair G-20 Windows
User's guide 2-4 Character spacing A-22
Adobe PostScript, Macintosh 3-13 FreeHand B-4
Conventions 1-5 Troubleshooting A-22
Overview 1-4 Windows 3.1
Utilities, Macintosh 1-9 Adobe Acrobat installation 4-7
App Drivers folder 3-22 Adobe PostScript driver 4-4, 4-
Downloader 3-30 5, 4-8
Downloads folder 3-20 Configuring RAM in PPD 6-14
Installation 3-5 Driver, deleting 4-15
Mac Watermark plug-in 3-13 PPD 4-10
XANTÉ Command Center 3-24 Selecting PPD options 6-8
XANTÉ Linearizer 3-29, 3-38 Windows 95
Utilities, PC 1-9 Adobe Acrobat installation 4-7
Configuration 4-31 Adobe PostScript driver 4-4, 4-
Installation 4-5, 4-6 5, 4-16
PDFs folder 4-28 Configuring RAM in PPD 6-14
PS_Files folder 4-29
I-18 Indexbb ______________________________________________

PPD 4-16, 4-20 Printer Information menu 3-25
Selecting PPD options 6-6 Printer Status menu 3-25
Windows NT Reboot Printer menu 3-26
Adobe Acrobat installation 4-7 Spooling menu 3-25, 3-32
Adobe PostScript driver 4-4, 4- Startup Page menu 3-26
5, 4-23 TCP/IP menu 3-28
PPD 4-23 Test Directory menu 3-26
Transfer Curve menu 3-29
X X•ACT Calibration menu 3-26, 3-
X•ACT 1-8, G-21 40
Macintosh 3-26, 3-40 XANTÉ Command Center, PC 4-
PC 4-37, 4-47 5, 4-31
x-Height B-21 Align Paper menu 4-35, 4-49
X-Screening G-21 Chat menu 4-34
XANTÉ Connection requirements 4-31
Bulletin board support A-26 Controller menu 4-32
Customer service A-24 CRD Directory menu 4-35
Enhanced Screening Technology 1- General menu 4-33
8, 6-10 Get Info menu 4-34
Fax support A-26 I/O Timeout menu 4-34
FilmStar 2 1-7 Installation 4-6
Halftone Calibration Technology Linearize menu 4-36, 4-43
1-8, 3-36, 4-43, 6-11 Novell menu 4-36
Myriad Film 1-7 Options menu 4-32
NEIT 1-9 Ports menu 4-38
Newsletter 1-10 Print Info menu 4-34
Phone support A-25 Receive Queue menu 4-34
Web page 1-6, A-26 Reset Controller menu 4-35
X•ACT 1-8, 3-40, 4-47 Select Product menu 4-33
XANTÉ Command Center, Macintosh Send Ctrl-D menu 4-35
3-5, 3-24 Send PostScript File menu 4-35
AppleTalk menu 3-28 Set Printer Name menu 4-35
Color menu 3-28 Spooler menu 4-36, 4-39
CRD Directories menu 3-29 Status menu 4-35
Download PostScript File menu 3- TCP/IP Address menu 4-35
26 Test Directory menu 4-37
General menu 3-24 Transfer Curve menu 4-37
Installation 3-5 Update PPD Fonts menu 4-35
Linearize menu 3-29, 3-36 X•ACT Calibration menu 4-37, 4-
Margin Adjustment menu 3-25, 3- 47
42
Networking menu 3-27
Novell Print Server menu 3-27
_______________________________________________ Index I-19

XANTÉ Enhanced Screening Tech-
nology 8-9
XANTÉ Halftone Calibration Tech-
nology 8-6
Custom gamma curve, Macintosh
3-39
Custom gamma curve, PC 4-46
XANTÉ Linearization Tool, PC 4-
5, 4-6, 4-38, 4-45
XANTÉ Linearizer, Macintosh 3-
5, 3-29, 3-38
XANTÉ Utilities folder 3-5
XANTÉ Utilities, Macintosh 1-9, 1-
10, 3-5
App Drivers folder 3-22
Downloader 3-30
Downloads folder 3-20
Installation 3-5
Mac Watermark plug-in 3-13
XANTÉ Command Center 3-24
XANTÉ Linearizer 3-29, 3-38
XANTÉ Utilities, PC 1-9, 1-10
CD-ROM 4-3
Configuration 4-31
Installation 4-5, 4-6
PDFs folder 4-28
PS_Files folder 4-29
XANTÉ Command Center 4-31
XANTÉ Linearization Tool 4-
38, 4-45
XInstall folder 4-5
XInstaller 3-5
XON/XOFF 2-40, G-6, G-21
XUtils folder 4-5
◊◊◊
I-20 Indexbb ______________________________________________

Xanté Accel-a-Writer 8300v3

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Xanté Accel-a-Writer 8300v3

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

®

Adobe®, Adobe® Illustrator®, Adobe® Photoshop®, Adobe® PageMaker®,

Canon® is a registered trademark of Canon USA, registered in the United

DEC® is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation,

Hewlett-Packard®, HP® and LaserJet® are registered trademarks of Hewlett-

Intel® and Pentium® are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation

FreeHand™ is a trademark of Macromedia, Inc. Microsoft®, MS-DOS®,

Novell® and NetWare® are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc., registered

Olivetti™ is a trademark of Olivetti, Inc.

QuarkXPress® is a registered trademark of Quark, Inc., registered in the

UL® is a registered trademark of Underwriters Laboratory, registered in the

Varityper® is a registered trademark of Varityper, Inc., registered in the

Ethernet® and Xerox® are registered trademarks of Xerox Corporation,

XANTÉ CORPORATION assumes no responsibility for, or liability

Warning! An invisible laser beam which radiates inside the laser

Warning! Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly

For 115 Volt Configuration:

For 230 Volt Configuration

Le cable de transport d'energie que doit etre utilis'e la configuration 230

Das Netzkabel ist das haupfsachliche Diskonnektionsmittel, es sollte in eine

I, the undersigned, hereby declare that the equipment specified above

Place Mobile, Alabama

Colophon and Credits

Credits: edited by Lesa Moore; written by Lane Crume, Stephanie Wright,

Chapter 2 - Installation ................................................................ 2-1

Chapter 3 - Macintosh Setup ....................................................... 3-1

Chapter 4 - PC Setup ................................................................... 4-1

Chapter 5 - Configuration ........................................................... 5-1

Chapter 6 - PPD Settings ............................................................. 6-1

Chapter 7 - Using Media and Toner ........................................... 7-1

Appendix A ................................................................................... A-1

Appendix B ................................................................................... B-1

Glossary ........................................................................................ G-1

_________________________________________ Introduction 1-1

1-2 Introductionbb ________________________________________

Fig. 1.1 XANTÉ Accel-a-Writer 8300

Your new Accel-a-Writer 8300 features Adobe PostScript 3. The

_________________________________________ Introduction 1-3

Chapter 1—Introduction provides an overview of this manual, the

Chapter 2—Installation provides instructions for unpacking and

Chapter 3—Macintosh Setup describes the contents and use of the

Chapter 4—PC Setup describes the contents and use of the

Chapter 5—Configuration describes how to configure the default

Chapter 6—PPD Settings describes the printer features that can be

Chapter 7—Media and Toner describes how to select and use

1-4 Introductionbb ________________________________________

Chapter 9—Maintenance and Technical Specifications describes

Appendix A—Troubleshooting provides troubleshooting tips,

Appendix B—Application Notes and Page Design provides

Glossary—defines many terms related to your printer, XANTÉ

The Accel-a-Writer 8300 Menu quick reference sheet illustrates

Courier indicates information you must type or which

↵ indicates that you need to press the Return key

Note: indicates additional or emphasized information.

Caution: indicates instructions which if not followed can

Warning! indicates instructions which must be followed

PostScript Language Reference Manual, Second Edition. This manual,

PostScript Language Tutorial and Cookbook. This manual,

Most bookstores and many computer businesses either keep these

About Your Printer

Your printer features true Adobe PostScript 3, not an emulation.

XANTÉ’s patent pending Accurate Calibration Technology (X•ACT)

1-6 Introductionbb ________________________________________